JVC BR-D95U User Manual

Download

VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED

Printed in Japan SL96197-002

BR-D95U VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

INSTRUCTIONS

For Customer Use:

Enter below the Serial No. which is located on the rear of cabinet. Retain this information for future reference.

Model No.

BR-D95U

Serial No.

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

INTRODUCTION

CONTROLS,

CONNECTORS

AND DISPLAY

CONNECTIONS

MENU SWITCH

SETTING

MENU SWITCH

SETTING

DETAILS

PREPARATION

RECORDING

PLAYBACK

EDITING

OTHER

FUNCTIONS

HOW TO USE

TIME CODE

RS-232C

PROTOCOL

EDITING SYSTEM

PHASE

ADJUSTMENT

TROUBLESHOOTING

SPECIFICA -

TIONS

APPENDIX

COMPONENT DIGITAL

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

UBDF

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

• This manual provides instructions in English and German.

English :pp. 2 to 151 German: pp. 154 to 174

• To maintain picture and sound quality, use the exclusive head cleaning cassette after every 20 hours of operation. For details on head cleaning, refer to page 11.

SL96197-002

This instruction book is made from 100% recycled paper.

This section of instruction manual is specially edited for service purpose with modified contents. It is not recommended to use, this section for the substitution of the original book in the merchandise.

CAUTION

1. Read all of these instructions.

2. Save these instructions for later use.

3. All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

4. Unplug this appliance system from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

5. Do not use attachments not recommended by the appliance manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

6. Do not use this appliance near water – for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc.

7. Do not place this appliance on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The appliance may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart or stand recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the appliance. Wall or shelf mounting should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting kit approved by the manufacturer. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.

8. Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, and to insure reliable operation of the appliance and to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the appliance on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This appliance should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This appliance should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase unless proper ventilation is provided.

9. This appliance should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supplied to your home, consult your dealer or local power company. For appliance designed to operate from battery power, refer to the operating instructions.

10. This appliance system is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug (a plug having a third (grounding) pin). This plug will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug.

11. For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.

12. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this appliance where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it.

13. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the appliance.

14. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in fire or electric shock.

15. Never push objects of any kind into this appliance through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the appliance.

16. Do not attempt to service this appliance yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

17. Unplug this appliance from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions

: a. When the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed. b. If liquid has been spilled into the appliance. c.If the appliance has been exposed to rain or water. d. If the appliance does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are

covered by the operating instructions as improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often

require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the appliance to normal operation. e. If the appliance has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged. f.When the appliance exhibits a distinct change in performance – this indicates a need for service.

18. When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer that have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, o

other hazards.

19. Upon completion of any service or repairs to this appliance, ask the service technician to perform routine safety checks to determine that the appliance is in safe operating condition.

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

( FOR USA AND CANADA )

CAUTION ATTENTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION

NE PAS OUVRIR

Le symbole de l’éclair à l’intérieur d'un triangle équilatéral est destiné à alerter l’utilisateur sur la présence d’une “tension dangereuse” non isolée dans le boîtier du produit. Cette tension est suffisante pour provoquer l’électrocution de personnes.

Le point d’exclamation à l’intérieur d’un triangle équilatéral est destiné à alerter l’utilisateur sur la présence d’opérations d’entretien importantes au sujet desquelles des renseignements se trouvent dans le manuel d’instructions.

*Ces symboles ne sont utilisés qu’aux Etats-Unis.

NOTE:

The rating plate (serial number plate) is on the rear of the unit.

AVERTISSEMENT: POUR EVITER LES RISQUES D'INCENDIE OU D'ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS EXPOSER L'APPAREIL A L'HUMIDITE OU A LA PLUIE.

Ce magnétoscope ne doit être utilisé que sur du courant alternatif en 120 V.

ATTENTION: Afin d'éviter tout resque d'incendie ou d'électrocution, ne pas utiliser d'autres sources d'alimentation électrique.

ATTENTION: POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION

NE PAS OUVRIR LE BOITER.

AUCUNE PIECE INTERIEURE N'EST

A REGLER PAR L'UTILISATEUR.

SE REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE EN CAS DE PROBLEME.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INDIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

This unit should be used with 120 V AC only.

CAUTION: To prevent electric shocks and fire hazards, do NOT use any other power source.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Reglement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.

REMARQUE:

La plaque d'identification (numéro de série) se trouve sur le panneau arrière de l'appareil.

INFORMATION

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the eqipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this eqipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

CAUTION

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT APPROVED BY JVC COULD VOID USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the canadian Interference-Causing Eqipment Regulations.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

( FOR EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA )

Warning Notice

FOR YOUR SAFETY (Australia)

1. Insert this plug only into effectively earthed threepin power outlet.

2. If any doubt exists regarding the earthing, consult a qualified electrician.

3. Extension cord, if used, must be three-core correctly wired.

IMPORTANT (In the United Kingdom)

Mains Supply (AC 230 V `)

WARNING – THIS APPARATUS

MUST BE EARTHED

The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code; GREEN-and-YELLOW: EARTH BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows. The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or which is coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

POWER SYSTEM Connection to the mains supply

This unit operates on voltage of 110 V to 240 V AC, 50 Hz/60 Hz.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

CAUTION

To prevent electric shock, do not open the cabinet. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

WARNING

This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.

Note:

The rating plate and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.

WARNING

It should be noted that it may be unlawful to re-record pre-recorded tapes, records, or discs without the consent of the owner of copyright in the sound or video recording, broadcast, or cable programme and in any literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work embodied therein.

CAUTION

RED colour indications on the operation panel are provided but they are not safety related. RED colour indications: (1) For Cassette Recording Button (2) For Level Over Audio In/Out Indicator (3) For Tape Error Indicator

This apparatus is designed in compliance with ISO 7779/1999 (Acoustics -- Measurement of airborne noise emmited by information technology telecommunications equipment), whose acoustic noise is less than 70 dB.

This equipment is in conformity with the provisions and protection requirements of the corresponding European Directives. This equipment is designed for professional video appliances and can be used in the following environments:

䡲 Controlled EMC environment (for example purpose built broadcasting or recording studio), and the rural

outdoors environment (far away from railways, transmitters, overhead power lines, etc.)

In order to keep the best performance and furthermore for electromagnetic compatibility we recommend to use cables not exceeding the following length:

Port Cable Length

AC INPUT Power supply cord 2.5 meters

SERIAL V/A IN Coaxial cable 10 meters

SERIAL V/A OUT Coaxial cable 10 meters

AES/EBU IN, OUT Coaxial cable 10 meters

RS-232C Shielded cable 3 meters

REMOTE Exclusive cable 5 meters

VIDEO CONTROL Exclusive cable 5 meters

COMPOSITE IN, OUT Coaxial cable 10 meters

REF IN Coaxial cable 10 meters

Y/R-Y/B-Y IN, OUT Coaxial cable 10 meters

TIME CODE IN, OUT Coaxial cable 10 meters

AUDIO IN CH1, CH2 Shielded twist pair cable 10 meters

AUDIO OUT CH1, CH2 Shielded twist pair cable 10 meters

AUDIO MONITOR Shielded cable 10 meters

PHONES Cable with headphones 3 meters

The inrush current of this apparatus is 17 amperes.

Caution

When in case that the strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism is near the audio in ch1, ch2 cable, the sound will contain noise. In such case, please keep the cable away from the disturbance.

MAIN FEATURES

● Do not record important material in the first two or three minutes of a tape.

● It may be unlawful to use any material recorded from TV broadcast programs or pre-recorded programs without the consent of the owner of copyright, except in cases where this material is recorded exclusively for personal use.

● JVC is not liable for compensation for loss or damage to recordings in the event this unit fails to record or play back properly because the unit malfunctions or a defective video cassette tape is used.

● This unit is designed for professional use.

CAUTION: 4-channel audio

insert editing

Do not try to perform audio insert editing on tapes with 4 audio channels when using a 2-channel audio DIGITAL S VCR (BR-D85U/E, BR-D80U/E, BRD750U/E). If audio insert editing is executed, audio signals recorded on DA3 and DA4 will be erased.

Thank you for purchasing the BR-D95U DIGITAL S Video Cassette Recorder with electronic editing capabilities.

● This unit can be used with either NTSC or PAL signal systems. Before using this unit, first select the signal system. The signal system you select will be indicated on the counter display with “525” for NTSC and “625” for PAL. For instructions on how to select the signal system, refer to “4-2 VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM SELECTION” on page 30.

● The optional SA-D95U digital interface board is required for input/output of serial digital signals.

CONDITION

525 625

Signal system indication

Counter display

● Superb picture quality achieved by the DIGITAL S format using 4:2:2 component digital processing

● Independently editable 4-channel PCM high-quality sound

4-channel PCM high-quality sound with 16-bit 48

kHz sampling. 4-channel audio can be edited independently.

● High-density metal tape based on the W-VHS format

● Built-in time code generator/reader to enable recording and reading of SMPTE/EBU-Standard time code and user bits

● Pre-read function

This function makes it possible to execute A/B roll

editing using only one player (video/audio insert only).

● Swap editing

The swap control function allows the player VCR to

be controlled from the recorder VCR via 9-pin remote cable. This allows automatic editing even when an editing controller is not available.

● Audio split editing

Audio edit start points can be set separately with

the video signal edit start point as a reference.

● Color frame servo function This function ensures that continuity of the color subcarrier phase is maintained during editing.

● Audio V fade function

This function fades the audio level during a

transition in V shape to reduce noise.

● Complete analog interface with input/output terminals for composite, color difference component and analog audio signals included as standard

● Internally installable serial digital interface board optionally available for configuration of fully digital systems

● Jog/search dial

● Built-in noiseless slow playback facility for noiseless

playback within a speed range of approximately –1 to +1 normal

● Audio monitor facility for search

The D-9 format provides two linear audio channels,

enabling audio monitoring even during video shuttle search.

● Tiltable front panel

● Playback audio output adjustment function

● Recording audio input adjustment function

● Video output adjustment function

Whenever (NTSC) or (525) is specified in this manual, the accompanying information applies only to the NTSC signal system. Similarly, information that is specified as (PAL) or (625) applies only to the PAL signal system.

This video cassette recorder uses the DIGITAL S format. It can only be used with video tape

cassettes bearing the “

” or “

COMPONENT DIGITAL

” logo.

COMPONENT DIGITAL

1INTRODUCTION ............................................... 8

1-1 Outline .................................................... 8

1-2 Maintenance ........................................... 9

1-3 Precautions .............................................10

1-4 Video Cassette .......................................11

1-5 Head Cleaning ........................................ 11

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS 12

2-1 Front Panel ............................................. 12

2-2 Sub Panel ............................................... 18

2-3 Rear Panel .............................................. 19

2-4 Counter Display ...................................... 21

2-5 On-screen Display .................................. 23

3 CONNECTIONS ................................................ 25

3-1 Input Connections ...................................25

3-2 Output Connections ................................ 26

3-3 Control System Connections .................. 27

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING ................................. 28

4-1 Menu Display Modes .............................. 28

4-2 Video Signal System Selection ...............30

4-3 Menu Switch Setting ............................... 31

4-4 Saving and Calling Up Menu Switch

Settings ...................................................32

4-5 Calling Up Functional Menu Switch (Direct

Access Function) .................................... 33

4-6 User Page Registration/Change/Delete

(User Page Function) .............................. 34

4-7 How to Lock the Menu Switch Settings ..... 37

4-8 Recording Current Adjustment ...............38

4-9 Hour Meter Data Display ........................39

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS ................40

5-1 Menu Switch List ..................................... 40

5-2 Menu Switch Setting Content .................43

6 PREPARATION ................................................. 65

6-1 Operation Mode Lock .............................65

6-2 Standby ON/OFF .................................... 66

6-3 Loading and Unloading the Cassette ...... 67

7 RECORDING ..................................................... 68

7-1 Preparation for Recording ....................... 68

7-2 Input Video and Audio Signal Selection .. 69 7-3 Audio Monitor Output Signal Selection ... 70

7-4 Audio Record level Adjustment ............... 71

7-5 Basic Recording Operations ................... 73

7-6 Digital audio signal input/output ..............74

8 PLAYBACK ....................................................... 75

8-1 Preparation for Playback ........................75

8-2 Basic Playback Operations .....................76

8-3 Audio Playback Level Adjustment ..........77

8-4 Manual Tracking Adjustment .................. 79

8-5 Error Correction ...................................... 80

8-6 Audio V.Fade Function ........................... 80

8-7 Simplified Playback Speed

Adjustment Function ............................... 81

8-8 Shuttle Search/Jog Operation ................. 82

8-9 Variable Slow Playback .......................... 83

8-10 Program Playback .................................. 85

8-11 FF, REW and Counter Memory

Functions ................................................ 86

8-12 Repeat Playback..................................... 86

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS ........................................ 87

9-1 Extra Line Data Recording/Playback ...... 87

9-2 EXTRA LINE, VITC LINE, V. BLANK

MASK and PB EXTENSION LINE

settings ................................................... 89

9-3 Simultaneous Operation ......................... 90

9-4 Fixed Time Cue Up Function .................. 91

9-5 Multi Cue-Up Function ............................ 92

9-6 Striping Rec Function .............................94

10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE ............................... 96

10-1 Time Code Display ................................. 96

10-2 Time Code Initial Setting (Preset) ........... 97

10-3 Time Code Recording .............................. 99

10-4 Time Code Playback............................. 101

10-5 Sub Time Code Recording and

Playback ............................................... 102

10-6 Time Code Switch Setting for Editing ... 103

11 EDITING........................................................... 104

11-1 Outline .................................................. 104

11-2 Color Frame Servo Setting ................... 105

11-3 Swap Editing ......................................... 107

11-4 Audio Split Editing................................. 112

11-5 Other Function ......................................113

11-6 Manual Editing ......................................114

11-7 Editing with the Pre-read Function........ 115

12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT .... 117

12-1 Connection............................................ 117

12-2 Adjustment ............................................ 118

12-3 Dubbing Loop Function .......................... 122

13 RS-232C Protcol .............................................123

13-1 Command tables................................... 123

13-2 RS-232C commands ............................ 124

13-3 Speed/data correspondence table ........ 134

13-4 Contents of the sense commands ........ 135

13-5 Menu switch setting information ........... 137

14 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................... 145

14-1 Warnings with Indicators....................... 145

14-2 Troubles not to be Warned by

Indicators .............................................. 147

15 APPENDIX ....................................................... 148

15-1 Operation button combinations ............. 148

15-2 Optional Accessories ............................148

15-3 Index .....................................................149

16 SPECIFICATIONS ...........................................150

1 INTRODUCTION

1-1 OUTLINE

This manual consists of the following sections.

Section 1 INTRODUCTION

Read this section carefully as it describes the precautions to be taken when operating this unit and the type of cassette to be used.

Section 2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND

DISPLAYS

If you are already familiar with the operation of professional VCRs, you will probably only need to read this section to get started.

Section 3 CONNECTIONS

This section describes basic connections between the BR-D95U and other units.

Section 4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

This unit incorporates a “Menu” function which allows you to set a variety of switches on screen. Setting procedures and setting items are described in this section.

Section 5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

This section describes the menu switch items and setting contents in detail.

Section 6 PREPARATION

This section describes how to set up the unit prior to operation and notes any precautions that need to be taken.

Section 7 RECORDING

This section describes recording operations and settings.

Section 8 PLAYBACK

This section describes playback operations and settings.

Section 9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

This section describes the following special functions.

• Setting the unit to record or play back information added to a video signal on an extra video line.

• Simultaneous operation of more than one VCR

• Cue-up function

Section 10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE

This section describes time code presetting, recording, and time code playback operation.

Section 11 EDITING

This section describes the editing operation and pre-read editing.

Section 12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUST

MENT

This section describes internal TBC phase adjustment and the dubbing loop function.

Section 13 RS-232C protocol

This section describes the data protocols used to control of this unit with a personal computer or other external RS-232C controller.

Section 14 TROUBLESHOOTING

This section suggests ways to handle potential difficulties or malfunctions.

Section 15 APPENDIX

This section includes descriptions of optional units and the index for this manual.

Section 16 SPECIFICATIONS

Use time Every 750H 1500H 3000H 4500H 6000H Drum assembling 䢇䢇䢇䢇䢇 (including heads) Head cleaner 䢇䢇䢇䢇䢇 Tape guide roller, etc. 䡬䢇䢇䢇䢇 Fixed head 夡䡬䢇䡬䢇 Belt pinch roller, etc. 䡬䢇䢇䢇䢇 Driving system parts 䡬䡬䡬䡬䢇

The video cassette recorder/player incorporates precision components. Regular maintenance is necessary to maintain the performance level required for professional use. The information below will help you determine a maintenance schedule that will ensure optimum performance over a long period of time.

● Maintenance

Just as regular oil changes, brake checks, and tune-ups are essential to keep your car running well over a long period, your VCR must be maintained regularly to ensure optimum long-term performance.

Continued use of the VCR without maintenance

may lead to the following malfunctions.

●

Recording or playback cannot be executed.

●

Picture and sound distortion.

●

Repeated warnings (stopping the operation). These malfunctions are mostly due to wear or deterioration of the VCR's internal components. Having these repaired can be expensive. Moreover, a sudden malfunction can not only lead to downtime and lost productivity, but can also damage the video cassette.

1-2 MAINTENANCE

This table should be used as reference only. Actual maintenance requirements will vary according to how the unit is used.

Maintenance consultation

Consult your local JVC dealer for more information about maintenance scheduling and costs.

1 INTRODUCTION

● Keeping track of operation (running) time

The total operation time reached by an ordinary home VCR in five to six years may be reached by a professional VCR in as few as five to six months. Therefore, it is important to closely monitor the total operation time. You can check the running time on the provided hour meter (drum running time). The hour meter is shown on the counter display or onscreen display on the monitor. Hour meter indication

The hour meter can be displayed by selecting

“DRUM HOUR” on the menu switch setting screen. For details, refer to “Hour meter indication” on page

39.

● Maintenance schedule

Depending on the operation time, inspect or replace the following mechanism components.

Replace the drum assembly (including the heads)

and head cleaner every 750 hours.

夡: Cleaning, check and adjustment 䡬: Check or replace as required. If replacement is

not required, clean it.

䢇: Replace.

1-3 PRECAUTIONS

1 INTRODUCTION

The BR-D95U incorporates highly sophisticated and complex technology. To ensure proper operation, be sure to take the following precautions.

Condensation

● Do not use this unit immediately after moving it from a cold place to a warm place or after switching on a heater in a cold room. This will cause water vapor to condense on the video head drum and tape guides and may damage the tape and the VCR.

● When condensation occurs, the warning message “02 1” is shown on the tape counter display. The cassette is automatically ejected (see page 145). The head drum then rotates automatically to dry itself. Leave the VCR in this state with the power on. Once the warning message “02 1” has turned off, operation can be resumed.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525 625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

Head drum

Video tape

Transportation

Always hold this unit by the side panels when carrying or moving it. If you hold it by the front panel, the tilt panel may open and you could drop the unit.

Installation and storage

● Avoid using the unit in places subject to the following conditions:

●

extreme heat or cold

●

strong magnetic field

●

high humidity

●

dust and soil

●

vibrations

● Handle the unit carefully

Do not block the ventilation openings, or place

anything heavy on the unit. Do not put any foreign materials into the cassette loading slot.

● Use the unit in a horizontal (flat) position only.

● Avoid violent shocks to the recording chassis

during transportation. Remove the cassette tape from the unit prior to transportation.

● Avoid leaving tapes in the Still or Record Pause mode for a long time as this may damage the tape.

● When not using the unit, set the [POWER] switch to “OFF” to avoid unnecessary power consumption.

● Do not stand or sit on the unit. This will damage the unit and may cause it to fall, resulting in injury.

● Do not install the BR-D95U in a location where it exposed to radiation, x-rays or corrosive gases.

Maintenance and cleaning

● This unit contains precision components to ensure the highest performance. For optimum long-term performance, proper maintenance and care are required. Consult your JVC dealer for replacement of parts, adjustment and servicing.

● Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet. Do not use benzene or thinner as these may melt or cloud the cabinet surface. To remove excessive dirt, clean the unit with a mild detergent diluted with water, then wipe it with a dry cloth.

About the provided power cables

Two power cables are provided with the BR-D95U. Use the one that corresponds to your power-supply.

● When usage voltage is 120 V or less; use the A-type (flat-pin type) power cable.

● When usage voltage is 127 V or over; use the C-type (round-pin type) power cable.

REC

OFF

REC

OFF

1-4 VIDEO CASSETTE

● Only cassettes bearing the “

” logo can be

used with this VCR.

● Cassettes bearing the S-VHS or VHS logo cannot be

used with this unit. If an S-VHS or VHS cassette is inserted, it will be automatically ejected.

● Video cassettes cannot be used upside down.

● Leaving the tape in a partially wound condition for a

long time may damage the tape. Rewind the tape to the beginning before storage.

● Tape performance cannot be maintained if a

cassette is used repeatedly. The more a tape is used, the more dropouts occur. Do not use dirty tapes or tapes which have been damaged as doing so may shorten the service life of the rotary heads.

1-5 HEAD CLEANING

䢇Cassettes bearing the “

” logo on the back are provided with a safety slide to prevent accidental erasure.

● Move the slide to OFF to prevent erasure.

● Move the slide to ON to allow recording.

Slide

Recordable

Not recordable

1 INTRODUCTION

Repeated recording and playback leads to accumulation of dust and other particles on the video and audio heads. Excessive accumulation will adversely affect the picture or sound quality. If head cleaning is not performed periodically, a type of mosaic noise called block noise may appear in the picture or the sound may be interrupted.

Be sure to clean the tape transport system with a dedicated head cleaning tape (optionally available DCL-5) once every 20 hours.

Use a dedicated head cleaning tape only. For details on use of the dedicated head cleaning tape, refer to the instructions provided with it.

Block noise

This unit is provided with a built-in head cleaner. Use it to remove dust from the heads.

REW

STOP

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

STAND BY

Head Cleaning mode

Cleaning procedure

1. Unload the cassette.

2. Press the [STANDBY], [REW], [STOP] and [FF] buttons simultaneously.

The built-in head cleaner in this unit cleans the

heads for about 5 seconds.

● If a cassette is inserted during head cleaning, the

head cleaning operation stops.

2-1 FRONT PANEL

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

[POWER] switch

When power is ON, the counter display is illuminated.

Cassette loading slot

S-VHS/VHS tapes cannot be used for either recording or playback.

Counter display

Usually displays tape time. With the MENU button pressed, it displays menu switch and hour meter settings. Displays warning codes when an abnormality occurs. For details, refer to page 21.

Level meter section

Indicates the audio recording or playback levels.

● The [CH4/TRACKING] meter can be switched between tracking display and CH4 audio level display with the [METER MODE TRACKING] button.

● Audio Level Display mode can be selected with the [METER MODE FINE] button.

● When the audio level adjust mode is set to Unity, the [P] or [R] indicator in the upper section of the meter lights. The [P] indicator lights in the Play Volume mode and the [R] indicator lights in the Record Volume mode. When the audio level adjust mode is set to Variable, the indicator goes out. You can use the audio level adjust knobs to adjust the levels in this mode.

● The audio reference level can be set with menu switch No. 257 <AUD REF. SIGNAL LEV.> (-20 dB or -18 dB).

[PHONES] headphone level adjust control

Adjusts signal level output from the [PHONES] jack.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

[PHONES] jack

Connect a set of headphones with a 6 mm-dia. plug to listen to the audio channel selected with the [AUDIO MONITOR] button.

[PLAY] audio playback level adjust knobs

Adjust the playback level for each channel (CH1 to CH4). To adjust the audio playback level, pull out the audio level adjust knobs. Turn clockwise to increase the level and counterclockwise to lower it. When audio level adjust knobs are pushed in, the Unity mode is engaged. Turning the knobs in this mode has no effect on the audio level. There are two ways to adjust playback levels: One way is to independently adjust playback levels for each channel (CH1 to CH4 channels); the other is to use the CH1 or CH3 adjust knob as a master volume control and the CH2 or CH4 knob as a balance control. You can select the method you prefer with menu switch No. 216 <AUD PB VOLUME MODE1>.

[REC] audio recording level adjust knobs

Adjust the recording level for each channel (CH1 to CH4). To adjust the audio recording level, pull out the audio level adjust knobs. Turn clockwise to increase the level and counterclockwise to lower it. When audio level adjust knobs are pushed in, the Unity mode is engaged. Turning the knobs in this mode has no effect on the audio level. There are two ways to adjust recording levels:

One way is to independently adjust recording

levels for each channel (CH1 to CH4 channels); the other is to use the CH1 or CH3 adjust knob as a master volume control and the CH2 or CH4 knob as a balance control. You can select the method you prefer with menu switch No. 215 <AUD REC VOLUME MODE1>.

2-1 FRONT PANEL

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

18 17 16 15 14

23 24

[METER MODE] buttons

䡲 [TRACKING] tracking meter mode button

● Press this button to switch between CH-4 audio

level meter and tracking meter. This button lights or blinks when the tracking meter is selected. Blinking indicates that auto tracking is OFF. (When setting menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING> to “OFF”)

䡲 [FINE] fine meter mode button

● Press this button to change the display

accuracy of the audio level meter. When the [FINE] indicator is illuminated, the meter display is in Fine mode. More precise level adjustment is possible in this mode.

[TRACKING] adjust knob

Manually adjusts tracking during playback.

After setting the [CH4/TRACKING] meter to

Tracking Display mode with the [TRACKING METER MODE] button, adjust this knob until the meter swings to the maximum level.

* To manually adjust tracking, set menu switch

No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING> to “OFF (0)”.

[SEARCH] button

● Starts search at the search speed set by the search dial.

● In the Menu Switch Setting mode, the menu switch setting can be changed by turning the jog dial while keeping this button pressed.

● During time code presetting, preset data can be changed by turning the jog dial while keeping this button pressed.

● Use this button to change the fixed time cue up data or the video control adjust parameters.

[VAR/P.PLAY] button

● To engage the Variable mode, press this button. The button will light when the Variable mode is engaged. In this mode, you can use the

dial to control slow-motion playback speed.

● Press this button while holding the [SHIFT] button down. The button blinks and the Program Play mode is engaged. * Before engaging the Program Play mode,

engage the Still or Stop mode.

For details, refer to “Program Playback” on page

85.

Search/jog dials

Turn for search/jog operation. The outer dial serves as a search control. The inner dial serves as a jog control.

● During playback, turn the jog dial while holding the [PLAY] button down to increase or decrease the playback speed. Playback speed corresponds to the speed with which you turn the dial. Turning the dial clockwise allows you to increase playback speed to up to 2 times normal speed. Turning it counterclockwise allows you to decrease playback speed until tape running stops. If you stop turning the jog dial, normal playback speed is restored.

● In the Variable mode, turn the outer search dial for variable slow playback from -1x to +1x.

● When menu switch No. 301 <DIRECT SEARCH> is set to “OFF”, hold the [PLAY] button down and turn the search dial during play to execute variable slow playback.

● In the Program Playback mode, hold the

[VAR/P.PLAY] button down and turn the inner jog dial to set the initial speed for program playback or to vary program playback speed.

● The jog dial is also used to select items when setting the menu switches or to set data when presetting the time code.

Caution

To use the search dial, first set it to the “STILL” position (with power ON).

2-1 FRONT PANEL

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

LINE: Lights when composite video signal input

(via rear panel's [COMPOSITE LINE IN] connector) is selected.

CPN: Lights when component video signal input

(via rear panel's [COMPONENT IN] connector) is selected.

All lit: All indicators light when the signal from the

internal signal generator is selected. The type of signal can be selected with menu switch No. 111 “REC SIGNAL SELECT”.

Blinking: The indicator blinks if no signal is input or

if the wrong type of signal is input.

[AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR SELECT] indicators

Show whether the input or monitor audio signal is selected. Press the

[AUDIO INPUT] button or

[AUDIO MONITOR] button to switch between the input or monitor indication.The channel indicator blinks if the selected signal does not conform to the standard. Along with the input indication, the type of signal (SDI, AES/EBU or ANALOG) is shown. With the monitor indication, the audio channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4) output to the monitor output L or R channel is shown.The channels can be switched with the

audio signal select buttons. When these three indicators (SDI, AES/EBU, ANALOG) are lit simultaneously, audio signals (1 kHz sine wave) from the built-in signal generator are selected. The signals from the built-in signal generator can be either 1 kHz audio signals or no sound. This is selectable with menu switches (No. 253 to No. 256). When the input audio signal indication is selected, these indicators blink if no SDI or AES/EBU signal is input. SDI and AES/EBU can only be selected when the optional SA-D95U digital interface board is installed.

[AUDIO INPUT] button

Press to select the input audio signal for the [AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR SELECT] indicators. The button illuminates when selected.

[AUDIO MONITOR] button

Press to select the monitor audio signal for the [AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR SELECT] indicators. The button illuminates when selected.

Audio signal select buttons

Press to select the input audio signal or monitor audio signal. The selected audio signal is shown by the

[AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR SELECT] indicators.

[PB PB/EE] button

Press to select the playback (PB) exclusive mode or PB/EE auto switching mode. The selected mode is shown by the indicators in the upper section of the counter display. When the PB/EE Auto Switching mode is engaged, set the VCR to the EE mode with menu switch No. 314 <PB/EE MODE>.

[REMOTE] button

Press to select remote/local operation. When remote operation is selected, “REMOTE” is shown in the upper section of the counter display. In the “REMOTE” mode, the unit can be operated via the remote controller connected to the rear panel’s [REMOTE IN (9P)] or [RS-232C] connector. On the VCR itself, only the [STAND BY], [STOP] and [EJECT] buttons will remain operable. To operate the VCR locally, that is with its operation buttons, press the [REMOTE] button so that the “REMOTE” indicator goes out.

[VCON] button

Press to adjust the video/audio parameters. Adjustable items are shown on the counter display. Turn the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button to make adjustments. You can adjust the video parameters by connecting an optional video controller to the rear panel’s [VIDEO CONTROL] connector. (See page 118.)

[RESET] button

Press to reset the CTL counter to “0:00:00:00”. The time code and user bits cannot be reset. When the edit points have been set, these settings are canceled.

When setting the fixed time cue up, press this button to reset the counter to “00:00:00:00”. For details, refer to “Fixed Time Setting” on page 91.

[COUNTER] button

Press to switch the counter between CTL counter,

time code, or user bits display. Press this button while

pressing the [SHIFT] button to display user bits.The

selected counter display mode is shown by the

indicators in the upper section of the counter display.

CTL: CTL counter display

TC: Time code display

UB: User bits display

(

Input video signal button

Press to select input video signals. The selected

video signal is shown by the

)

[VIDEO INPUT] indicators. SIF can only be selected when the optional SA-D95U digital interface board is installed. A menu switch is provided to prevent misoperation. Refer to the menu switch setting for No. 371 “INPUT SELECT SAFETY”.

)

[VIDEO INPUT] indicators

Show the type of video signal selected with the

(

input video signal switch. SIF: Lights when serial video signal input (via rear

panel's [SERIAL V/A IN] connector) is selected.

2-1 FRONT PANEL

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

Setting buttons

䡲 [MENU] button

● Press this button to enter the Menu Switch

Setting mode. Press this button again to switch back to the Counter Display mode.

䡲 [SET] button

● Press this button to store menu switch setting

data in the VCR’s memory.

● Press this button to preset data in the time code

generator.

● Use this button to end video parameter

adjustment or to use the counter memory function.

䡲 [HOLD] button

● Press this button to preset data in the time code

generator. To preset time code, the [COUNTER] switch must be set at “TC”. To preset user bits, the [COUNTER] switch must be set at “UB”.

* This button is effective only when the [INT/EXT]

switch on the time code setting section is set to “INT” and the [PRESET/REGEN] switch is set to “PRESET”.

Operation buttons

● All buttons are illuminated when pressed.

● The labels printed under the operation buttons

indicate the menu items displayed when the button is pressed in the Menu Switch Setting (Direct Access) mode.

䡲 [EJECT] button

● Press to eject the cassette.

● TOP menu switch items are displayed when

this button is pressed in the Menu Switch Setting mode.

䡲 [REC] button

● Engages the Record mode when pressed

together with the [PLAY] button.

● To monitor the EE picture during playback, press and hold this button.

● Press this button in the Stop mode to check preset data in the time code generator.

䡲 [PLAY] button

● Press to start playback. If pressed together with

the [REC] button, recording will start.

● Video menu switch items are displayed when this button is pressed in the Menu Switch Setting mode.

● When menu switch No. 301 <DIRECT SEARCH> is set to “OFF”, hold this button down and turn the search dial during play to perform variable slow playback.

● By turning the jog dial while pressing this button in the Play mode, you can vary playback speed between 0 (Still) and +2 (double-speed) Refer to “Simplified playback speed adjustment function” on page 84.

● In the Program Playback mode, hold the

[VAR/P.PLAY] button down and press this button to execute program playback.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

2-1 FRONT PANEL

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

䡲 [PAUSE/STILL]

● Engages the Pause mode when pressed during

recording. Press the [PLAY] button to resume recording.

● Engages the Still mode when pressed in the Play, Search or Stop (Standby On/Off) modes. Press the [PLAY] button to resume playback.

● Audio menu switch items are displayed when this button is pressed in the Menu Switch Setting mode.

䡲 [STANDBY] button

● Switches the Standby mode between ON and

OFF in the Stop mode. The button is illuminated in the Standby On mode.

● The head drum continues to rotate when the Standby mode is on. This enables the unit to quickly switch modes when another function is engaged. The head drum does not rotate when the Standby mode is off. This protects the cassette tape and heads from damage.

● Servo and system menu switch items are displayed when this button is pressed in the Menu Switch Setting mode.

䡲 [REW] button

● Press this button to rewind the tape. The

maximum rewind speed during rewind can be selected with menu switch No. 319 <FF/REW MAX SPEED>.

● Output mode during rewinding can be selected with menu switch No. 314 <PB/EE MODE> (with the [PB PB/EE] button set to PB/EE Auto Switching mode).

● Pressing this button together with the [PLAY] button during playback slows playback speed slightly to 0.93 times normal speed.

● Time code menu switch items are displayed when this button is pressed in the Menu Switch Setting mode.

䡲 [STOP] button

● Press this button to stop any operation. The

Output mode in this state can be selected with [PB PB/EE] button.

● On-screen menu switch items are displayed when this button is pressed in the Menu Switch Setting mode.

䡲 [FF] button

● Press this button to fast-forward the tape. The

maximum fast-forward speed can be selected with menu switch No. 319 <FF/REW MAX SPEED>. The Output mode during fast-forward can be selected with menu switch No. 314 <PB/ EE MODE> (with the [PB PB/EE] button set to PB/EE Auto Switching mode).

● Pressing this button together with the [PLAY] button during playback increases playback speed slightly to 1.07 times normal speed.

● The drum hour meter is displayed when this button is pressed in the Menu Switch Setting mode.

Player/recorder select button

Selects the player or recorder in swap editing. Press the [PLAYER] button to operate the player and the [RECORDER] button to operate the recorder. The button corresponding to the selected unit will be illuminated. (Refer to menu switch No. 372 <P+R AT SWAP MODE> on page 58.)

Editing mode select buttons

Use to select assemble editing or insert editing (VIDEO, DA-1 to DA4, TC). Set before preview or actual editing.

[ASSEM] button: Press to execute assemble

editing. VIDEO, DA1 to DA4 and TC are all recorded.

[INSERT] buttons: Press these buttons according

to the signal(s) you want to insert.

● A signal corresponding with an illuminated button is “ON”. A signal corresponding with a non-illuminated buttons is “OFF”.

● You cannot select both assemble and insert editing. Pressing the [ASSEM] button automatically switches OFF the [INSERT] button and vice versa.

● Each of the [INSERT] buttons can be set to ON/ OFF during insert editing.

● The [DA1] to [DA4] audio insert buttons blink when the audio edit IN point for the audio split editing has been registered.

● The [ASSEM] button cannot be set to ON/OFF during assemble editing.

[SHIFT] button

While pressing this button down, press the

[VAR/P.PLAY] button to start program playback. While pressing this button, press the

[PREVIEW] button to execute the review operation of editing.

While pressing this button, press the

[PREROLL] button to execute the fixed time cue up operation. For details, refer to “Fixed Time Cue Up” on page 91. Press the [AUTO EDIT] button while pressing this button to execute a “last edit”. For other operation button combinations using the [SHIFT] button, refer to “Operation button combinations” on page 148.

Edit point setting buttons

Use these buttons to register, erase, correct and check edit points.

䡲 [IN] edit IN button

Use this button to enter the edit IN point and show it on the counter display. Press this button and the [OUT] button simultaneously to display the duration of an edit. When the edit IN point is entered, this button lights. While pressing this button, turn the jog dial clockwise to shift the IN point in the forward direction or turn it counterclockwise to shift the IN point in the reverse direction.

䡲 [ENTRY] button

Press this button while pressing the [IN] or [OUT] button to enter the edit IN point or OUT point.

䡲 [OUT] edit OUT button

Use this button to enter the edit OUT point and show it on the counter display. Press this button and the [IN] button simultaneously to display the duration of an edit. When the edit OUT point is entered, this button lights. While pressing this button, turn the jog dial clockwise to shift the OUT point in the forward direction or turn it counterclockwise to shift the OUT point in the reverse direction.

䡲 [CANCEL] button

Press this button while pressing the [IN] or [OUT] button to cancel the edit IN or OUT point.

[PREVIEW] button

Press to start editing rehearsal. this button will light. During preview editing, you can press this button again if you want to restart the preview. To review an edit, press this button together with the

[SHIFT] button.

[AUTO EDIT] button

Press to start auto editing. This button will light.

Press this button while pressing the [SHIFT] button to execute a last edit.

[PREROLL] button

Press this button when the tape is at the position

where you want recording to start after preroll. The tape will be rewound from the point where you press this button for the preroll duration set with the menu switch No.320 “PREROLL TIME”. During preroll operation, this button lights and goes out when the preroll operation ends.

If an edit IN point has been already entered,

preroll is based on the edit IN point.

When this button is pressed in the Menu Switch

Setting mode, the menu switch items registered for the user menu are shown.

2-1 FRONT PANEL

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

2-2 SUB PANEL

The sub panel can be accessed by opening the operation panel. To open the operation panel, refer to the figure below.

[TIME CODE] switches 䡲 [DF/NDF] drop frame/non-drop frame mode

switch (NTSC only)

● To set the time code drop frame/non-drop frame.

* Effective only when the [INT/EXT] switch is set

to “INT” and the [PRESET] switch is set to “PRESET”.

DF: To write the time code in the Drop Frame

mode. The [DF] indicator lights on the counter display.

NDF: To write the time code in the Non-drop

Frame mode.

䡲 [INT/EXT] time code select switch

● To select internal or external time code

generation.

INT: To use the internal time code generator. EXT: To use an external time code generator.

䡲 REC/FREE Run mode select switch

● To select one of two Run modes available with

the internal time code generator.

* Effective only when the [PRESET/REGEN]

switch is set to “PRESET” and the [INT/EXT] switch to “INT”.

REC: Time code runs only during recording. FREE: Time code runs in real time regardless of

the VCR’s operating mode. Select this position for editing.

䡲 PRESET/REGEN select switch

● To select the Internal Time Code Generator

mode.

* Effective only when the [INT/EXT] switch is set

to “INT”.

PRESET: Select this mode to preset time code

data.

REGEN: Select this mode when using the internal

time code generator in sync with a playback time code signal.

[CF] color frame servo switches

Use to switch the color frame servo ON/OFF.

● For the PAL signal system, select the 4 or 8 field color frame servo with the [4/8] switch on the side.

How to open the operation panel

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

● Lift the bottom edge of the panel to open it. The operation panel can be locked in 6 steps in the range of 0 to 90˚.

Lock release lever

● To return the panel to its original position, pull the lock release levers in the direction shown by the arrows and push down the panel.

SERVICE USE ONLY

OFF

HID GND

OFF

TIME CDOE

INT

FREE

PRESET

EXT

NDF

REC

REGEN

ON SCREENCF

(625)

● For the NTSC signal system, the [4/8] switch is disabled.

* To set the color frame servo with these

switches, set menu switch No. 008 <CAP LOCK> to “SW SEL”. (See page 105)

[ON SCREEN] select switch

Use to switch the on-screen menu ON/OFF. The on-screen information is output from the [LINE-2 SUPER] connector. * If menu switch No. 513 <EDIT ON SCREEN> is

set to “ON”, you cannot turn the on-screen display off. (See page 24)

Service connectors

[RF] ... RF test signal output connector [HID] ... Trigger signal output connector [G] ... Ground connector

[SERVICE USE ONLY] connector

Used to diagnose malfunctions and for other service procedures.

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

2-3 REAR PANEL

CH1/2

CH3/4

OUT

IN OUT

R-Y

B-Y

R-Y

OUT

OFF

LINE1

LINE2

SUPER

RS-232C

COMPOSITE

LINE IN

REF

COMPONENT

COMPOSITE

REMOTE IN (9P)

REMOTE OUT (9P)

VIDEO CONTROL

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

OUT

SERIAL V / ASERIAL V / A

AES / EBUAES / EBU

VIDEO

TIME CODE

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO MONITOR

[TIME CODE IN] connector ... XLR

● Accepts external LTC time code signals conforming to the SMPTE/EBU standard. Connect this connector to an external time code generator. A signal containing a large amount of jitter cannot be used for LTC time code. Be sure to use a regenerated signal (stable signal matched with the phase of video signals).

[REF IN] external sync signal input connector/

75 terminating switch (loop-through) .... BNC

● Accepts external reference sync signals. Because of its loop-through design, this connector can distribute signals to other units through the opposite terminal. Set the terminating switch to OFF when distributing signals. If signal distribution is not desired or is terminated at this unit, set the switch to ON.

● Does not accept signals with an input level over 1 Vp-p.

* When setting up an editing system, input a

black burst or standard color signal to this unit. The [GEN] indicator will light.

[COMPOSITE IN] connectors [LINE IN] video line input connector ...BNC

● Accepts composite video signals. Input composite signals passed through the TBC.

[SERIAL V/A IN] connectors ... BNC

● Accepts serial video/audio signals. The lower connector is an active loop through connector. If the VCR is not turned on, no signal will be output.

Serial signals cannot be input if the optional

SA-D95U digital interface board is not installed. Always input external sync signals when inputting digital signals. Both video and audio must be synchronized with the external sync signal.

[AC IN] socket

Connect to an AC power outlet via the provided power cable.

● When usage voltage is 120 V or less; use the A-type (flat-pin type) power cable.

● When usage voltage is 127 V or over; use the C-type (round-pin type) power cable.

[SIGNAL GND] ground terminal

This terminal is a GND for signals among unit.

[AES/EBU IN] connector .... BNC x 2

Accepts digital audio interface standard (AES/ EBU) digital audio signals. These signals cannot be input if the optional

SA-D95U digital interface board is not installed. Always input external sync signals when inputting digital signals. Both video and audio must be synchronized with the external sync signal.

When the serial digital inputs and outputs of several VCRs are connected in series, do not input the same signal to each VCR as they may not be input correctly. Digital audio signals, in particular, will not be input correctly to the next VCR in the series.

[Y.R-Y.B-Y IN] component signal input

connector .... BNC x 3

● Accepts component video signals. Set menu switch No. 104 <CPN LEV./SETUP (525)> to select MII (LOW), Bcam (HIGH) and the presence of setup signals (NTSC only). The default setting is Bcam with setup.

[AUDIO IN] connector .... XLR x 4

● Accepts analog audio signals.

● Set the input level with menu switches No. 224

to 227 <AUDIO IN LEVEL>. The factory setting is +4 dB.

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

2-3 REAR PANEL

CH1/2

CH3/4

OUT

IN OUT

R-Y

B-Y

R-Y

OUT

OFF

LINE1

LINE2

SUPER

RS-232C

COMPOSITE

LINE IN

REF

COMPONENT

COMPOSITE

REMOTE IN (9P)

REMOTE OUT (9P)

VIDEO CONTROL

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

OUT

SERIAL V / ASERIAL V / A

AES / EBUAES / EBU

VIDEO

TIME CODE

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO MONITOR

[AUDIO OUT] connectors

● Output analog audio signals.

● The output level can be set with menu switches

No. 228 to 231 <AUDIO OUT LEVEL>. Factory setting is +4 dB.

[TIME CODE OUT] connector ... XLR

● Outputs a time code signal to the external time

code generator. LTC time code conforming to the SMPTE/EBU standard can be output. Outputs a time code signal during search if menu switch No. 452 <SEARCH LTC> is set to ON (1).

Control connectors  [RS-232C] connector ... D-Sub 9-pin

Connect equipment conforming to the RS-232C interface standard such as a personal computer.

 [REMOTE IN (9P)] connector ... D-Sub 9-pin

Connect an RS-422 serial editing remote control unit.

 [REMOTE OUT (9P)] connector ... D-Sub 9-pin

Connect a VCR with RS-422 serial interface. Connect to the other VCR’s [REMOTE IN] connector to operate it from this VCR.

 [VIDEO CONTROL] connector ... D-Sub 15-pin

Use to adjust the built-in TBC from an optional video remote controller (Sony's BVR-50).

[SERIAL V/A OUT] connector ... BNC x 2

Outputs serial video/audio signals. When menu switch No. 237 <EMBEDDED AUDIO> is set to “OFF”, digital audio signals are not output. When connecting to a VCR which is not equipped to handle EMBEDDED AUDIO, set to “OFF”. No signals are output if the optional SA-D95U digital interface board is not installed.

[AES/EBU OUT] connector ... BNC x 2

● Outputs digital audio interface standard (AES/ EBU) digital audio signals. Digital signals cannot be output if the optional SA-D95U digital interface board is not installed.

[Y.R-Y.B-Y. OUT] component signal output connector ... BNC x 3

● Outputs the component video signal. Set menu switch No. 104 <CPN LEV./SETUP (525)> to select MII (LOW), Bcam (HIGH) and the presence of setup signals (NTSC only). The default setting is Bcam with setup.

[COMPOSITE OUT] connectors  [LINE 1] connector

Outputs composite video signals.

 [LINE 2 - SUPER] connector

Outputs composite video signals. When the [ON SCREEN] switch on the sub panel is set to “ON”, the time counter indication, operating mode, etc. is superimposed on the screen image. The menu switch items are shown in the Menu Switch Setting mode. Adjustment parameters and current settings are displayed on screen when the video parameters are being adjusted.

[AUDIO MONITOR] connectors

● Outputs the audio signal selected with the front panel's [AUDIO MONITOR] button and

audio

signal select buttons.

● The output level can be set with menu switches No. 232 to 233 <AUDIO MON LEVEL>. Factory setting is +4 dB.

CONDITION

CTL

CONDITION

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

2-4 COUNTER DISPLAY

3. Hour meter data display

Hour meter data (drum operation time) can be displayed in the Menu Switch Setting mode. For details, refer to “Hour meter data display” on page 39.

4. Video/audio control display.

Shows video and audio control adjustment items. Select with the jog dial. Pressing the [VCON] button restores the Tape Counter Display mode.

5. Warning code display

If a malfunction occurs, the corresponding warning code is automatically displayed. For details, refer to “Warnings with Indicators” on page 145.

1. Tape counter display

The display usually serves as a tape time counter (hours, minutes, seconds, frames). CTL counter, time code or user bits can be selected with the front panel [COUNTER] switch. “NO TAPE” is displayed if a cassette has not been loaded.

● The Menu Switch Setting mode is entered when

the [MENU] button is pressed.

How to reset the CTL counter

● Pressing the [RESET] button resets the CTL

counter to “0:00:00:00”. Time codes and user bits cannot be reset.

● The CTL counter is also reset to “0:00:00:00”

when the cassette is ejected.

2. Menu switch setting display

To select menu functions and perform menu switch setting. Menu functions and menu switch items can be changed with the jog dial. See page 31 “Menu Switch Setting” for details.

● The counter display shows symbols and

numbers.

● Pressing the [MENU] button restores the Tape

Counter Display mode.

Menu setting display

[MENU] button

Tape counter

When the VCR malfunctions

[VCON] button

[COUNTER] button or [SHIFT]+[COUNTER] buttons

[COUNTER] button

Time code

[SHIFT]+[COUNTER] buttons

User bits

Video control display

Warning display

Hour meter display

Jog dial

CONDITION

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525 625

2-4 COUNTER DISPLAY

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

Indicator section

[VCON] button

* During swap editing, player information is shown only by the

indicators in the section when the player is selected. The [AUTO OFF] indicator always shows recorder information.

Indication Meaning when lit

CTL The CTL counter is shown. TC The time code is shown. UB The user bits are shown. DF The CTL counter or time code is in the

drop-frame mode. (525) SERVO Servo is stable. CF The color frame servo is set. This

indication lights during recording. When

the [CF] switch is ON and a tape with color

frame information is played back, this

indication also lights.

When the PLAYER is selected during

SWAP editing, the [CF] indication does not

light. GEN Signals are input to the [REF] connector.

(Blinking) GEN The input digital audio signals cannot be

recorded correctly because no external

sync signal is input.

16:9 Wide aspect ID signal is being played back. AP A non-D-9 tape is played back.

AUTO OFF A malfunction or abnormality has occurred. P. READ The VCR is in the Pre-read mode. V. VAR The video parameters can be adjusted. PB/EE The PB/EE Auto Switching mode is

selected.

PB The PB mode is selected. REMOTE The VCR is in the Remote mode. CONDITION

Channel condition is normal.

Minor errors.

Major errors. Normal playback is not

possible.

(Blinking) Tracking is not correct.

Video signal system

525 The NTSC signal system is set.

625 The PAL signal system is set.

The video signal system can be set with menu switch No. D95 <525/625> (on the top menu). After selecting the video signal system, turn this unit OFF then ON again to switch to the selected video signal system.

The following error messages may be displayed during swap editing.

Indication Meaning

Local The player’s Local/

Remote is set to “Local”.

No Tape No cassette is loaded in

the VCR.

Bump Error Bump error occurs.

No Edit Cmd The edit mode is not

selected.

Dur = 0 Duration is set to 0.

Servo Error Servo error occurs.

Split No A. The audio insert mode is

not selected.

Rec Inh Recording is not possible

on this cassette.

IN/OUT Rev The IN and OUT points

are reversed in terms of the timeline.

Over 300% Tape speed is more than

3x.

Over -200% Reverse tape speed is

more than -2x.

VTR No Play The VCR will not

function.During editing, the VCR stops.

AuCondition Editing was interrupted

because of audio conditions deteriorated.

NO CTL Stops the operation when

insert editing is executed in a non-recorded section.

●

Press the [STOP] button to release error display indications.

●

“No Tape” indication goes out when a cassette tape is loaded.

Video/audio control display

* For adjustment of each item, refer to

“Video control adjustment” on page 118.

E     F Remaining time of 15 minutes or more E    Remaining time of less than 15 minutes E   Remaining time of less than10 minutes E  Remaining time of less than 5 minutes E 

(blinking)

Remaining time of less than 2 minutes

(blinking)

Remaining time of less than 1 minutes

No indication The remaining time is being calculated.

PLAY

R: TCR 00:00:00:01

STOP

TCR

00:00:00:00

SUB TCR

00:00:00:00

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

2-5 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

1. Tape counter display, etc.

Menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION SELECT>

SUB read-out mode

TC read-out mode

Counter mode

Operation mode

Sub time code

Counter

F F F F F

On-screen display

On-screen information is available only via the rear panel [LINE 2 - SUPER OUT] connector.

1. Tape counter display

● Shows data when the [ON SCREEN] switch on

the sub panel is set to ON.

● You can choose what information is shown with

menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION SELECT>. Only time data is displayed when “TIME (0)” is selected. Both time data and VCR operation mode are displayed when “TIME & MODE (1)” is selected.

● The display position can be shifted horizontally

with menu switch No. 501 <CHARA H.POSITION> and vertically with No. 502 <CHARA V.POSITION>.

● Set the [ON SCREEN] switch on the sub panel

to OFF to turn off the on-screen display. * If menu switch No. 513 <EDIT ON SCREEN>

is set to “ON”, you cannot turn the on-screen display off.

● When menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION

SELECT> is set to “TIME + SUB TC” or “TIME + SUB TC + MODE”, sub time code information is shown simultaneously on a different line.

2. Menu switch setting display

Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu setting display on screen.

● Select a menu item by turning the jog dial. For

details, refer to “Menu switch setting” on page 31.

● Pressing the [MENU] button restores the normal

display.

3. Hour meter data display

Hour meter data can be displayed in the Menu Switch Setting mode. For details, refer to “Hour meter data display” on page 39.

4. Warning code display

If a malfunction occurs, the corresponding warning code is automatically displayed. For details, refer to “Warnings with Indicators” on page 145.

5. Tape remaining time display

When menu switch No. 505 <REMAIN ENABLE> is set to “ENABLE(1)”, tape remaining time is shown in 6 steps.

Player/recorder indication

2. Menu setting display

0002

DH:DRUM HOUR METER

3. Hour meter data display

4. Warning display 5. Tape remaining time display

WARNING 02 1

CONDENSATION ON DRUM

PLAY

CTL 0:00:00:00

008:CAP LOCK(525)

SW SEL

002:OPERATION LOCK

OFF

003:SYNC SELECT

AUTO

005:AUTO TRACKING

009:CAP RE-LOCKING DIR.

ACCELERATION

* Shown when the tape speed is less than ±0.3x.

Player/recorder indication

When the editing screen display is not shown during swap editing, this indicates which VCR's data is currently displayed on the tape counter. P:When the player is selected (SUBTC is not shown) R:

When the recorder or both the recorder and player are selected.

Counter mode

CTL : CTL data TCR : Time code reader data TC1 : Time code reader data (when the first field is played back)* TC2 : Time code reader data (when the second field is played

back)* TCR• : CTL interpolation mode TCG : Time code generator data UBR : User bits reader data UBG : User bits generator data LTC : LTC data

Drop-frame display (NTSC only)

In recording or playback in the Drop-frame mode, the counter display is as shown below.

TCR 00:00:00

Drop frame indication

2-5 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

Operation mode display in the Variablemotion mode

Noiseless slow-motion playback is available at speeds of -1.0 to +1.0 times normal.

● Variable-motion playback at speeds outside this range

(from -1.0 times to +1.0 times) results in a distorted picture.

● When variable-motion playback is performed at speeds

outside the range from -1.0 times to +1.0 times, “!” appears with the operation mode on the on-screen display.

The “MUTING” or “CONDITION ALARM” can be shown on screen to make it easy to check VCR operating status on the monitor connected to the [LINE 2- SUPER OUT] connector.

 To display MUTING/CONDITION ALARM on screen, set menu switch No. 512 <MUTING/ALARM MESSAGE>

to “ON (1)”.

This can also be displayed even when setting the [ON SCREEN] switch on the sub panel to OFF.

Error rate degradation can also be checked with the [CHANNEL CONDITION] indicator on the front panel (refer to page 22).

Editing screen display

CTL -0:00:00:01

Operation mode

● -1.0 times slow-motion

playback: VAR -1.0

● -1.5 times slow-motion

playback: !VAR -1.5

Monitor screen

● Tape remain is shown when the remaining time is less

than 25 minutes (approx.).

● This display automatically appears whenever an editing-

related button is pressed (such as selecting the edit mode). (With menu switch No. 513 <EDIT ON SCREEN> set to “ON”)

● When menu switch No. 513 <EDIT ON SCREEN> is set

to “ON”, press the [STANDBY] + [SHIFT] to switch the edit screen ON/OFF.

MUTING/CONDITION ALARM display

CONDITION ALARM

(Menu switch No. 512 <MUTING/ALARM MESSAGE> set to “ON (1)”)

CONDITION ALARM display

If video head output (error rate) is degraded during playback, the “CONDITION ALARM” is shown on screen.

● When the “CONDITION ALARM” is displayed,

perform manual tracking adjustment or cleaning with the dedicated head cleaning tape.

MUTING display

● This unit outputs black signals from the built-in

signal generator via the <LINE 2 - SUPER OUT> connector.

• In Record or EE mode: When no video signal is input or input signals do not contain a sync signal

• In Play mode: When there are no recorded signals (no control signal recorded) on the tape being played back (With menu switch No. 120 <NO CTL MUTING> set to “ON”)

● When the input signal is a black signal or when a

tape on which a black signal is recorded is played back, the monitor’s screen will be black.

To differentiate between the types of black screen described above, “MUTING” appears on the screen when the black screen is due to black signals output from the built-in signal generator.

(Menu switch No. 512 <MUTING/ALARM MESSAGE> set to “ON (1)”)

MUTING

Monitor screen

R:SHTL STIL

DUR.

P:STOP

CTL

CTL 0:01:48:00

SPLIT

- :15:01

V•A1•A2•A3•A4•TC

Editing mode

Recorder current time

Tape remain

Player edit point

Player operation mode Recorder operation mode

Player current time

Audio sprit time

Duration

Recorder edit point

Edit point registration indications:

P IN ' OUT R IN ' OUT'

:43:04

-0:00:51:03

0:01:48:00 0:01:31:04

0:00:00:00 0:00:43:04

+030 P R

Variable mode tape speed

R IN OUT

Show edit points registered by pressing the [ENTRY] button.

CH1/2

CH3/4

OUT

IN OUT

R-Y

B-Y

R-Y

OUT

OFF

LINE1

LINE2

SUPER

RS-232C

COMPOSITE

LINE IN

REF

COMPONENT

COMPOSITE

REMOTE IN (9P)

REMOTE OUT (9P)

VIDEO CONTROL

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

OUT

SERIAL V / ASERIAL V / A

AES / EBUAES / EBU

VIDEO

TIME CODE

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO MONITOR

3 CONNECTIONS

3-1 INPUT CONNECTIONS

[SERIAL V/A IN]

Install the optional SA-D95U digital interface board to input signals to this connector.

[AUDIO IN]

Set the audio input reference level with menu switches No. 224 to 227 <AUDIO IN LEVEL>.

[COMPONENT IN]

Accepts component video signals.

[AES/EBU IN]

Install the optional SA-D95U digital interface board to input signals to this connector.

[TIME CODE IN]

To record the time code input from this connector, set the [INT/EXT] switch on the sub panel to “EXT” and menu switch No. 409 <EXT REGEN TC> to “LTC”.

Digital signal synchronization

The input digital signal must be synchronized with the video signals. To do this, input sync signals to the digital signal output unit and the [REF] connector of this unit.

Reference sync signal

The servo system of this unit automatically selects the reference signal as shown in the table below depending on the setting of the menu switch and the operation.

[REF]

[TIME CODE IN][COMPOSITE IN][SERIAL V/A IN]

[COMPONENT IN] [AUDIO IN][AES/EBU IN]

Setting of menu switch N. 003 <SYNC SELECT>

AUTO

EXT

Input sync signal

Operation

Video input [REF] input

Recording r 

Playback  r

Recording rR

Playback  r

: Synchronizes (highest priority)

: Synchronizes.



: Does not synchronize.

• If video input and [REF] input are not available, internal sync is performed.

CH1/2

CH3/4

OUT

IN OUT

R-Y

B-Y

R-Y

OUT

OFF

LINE1

LINE2

SUPER

RS-232C

COMPOSITE

LINE IN

REF

COMPONENT

COMPOSITE

REMOTE IN (9P)

REMOTE OUT (9P)

VIDEO CONTROL

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

OUT

SERIAL V / ASERIAL V / A

AES / EBUAES / EBU

VIDEO

TIME CODE

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO MONITOR

3-2 OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

[TIME CODE OUT][SERIAL V/A OUT]

[AUDIO OUT]

[AES/EBU OUT]

[COMPONENT OUT]

Set the component output level with menu switch No. 104 <COMPONENT LEVEL>.

● All video parameter settings except SCH phase can be adjusted. (See page 119.)

[AES/EBU OUT]

Install the optional SA-D95U digital interface board to output signals from this connector.

[AUDIO MONITOR]

3 CONNECTIONS

[COMPONENT OUT]

[COMPOSITE OUT]

[SERIAL V/A OUT]

Install the optional SA-D95U digital interface board to output signals from this connector.

● All video parameter settings except SCH phase can

be adjusted. (See page 119.)

[AUDIO OUT]

Set the audio output reference level with menu switches No. 228 to 231 <AUDIO OUT LEVEL>.

[TIME CODE OUT]

Select the time code output method during search with menu switch No. 452 <SEARCH LTC>.

[AUDIO MONITOR]

Set the audio output reference level with menu switches No. 232 and 233 <AUDIO MON LEVEL>.

[COMPOSITE OUT]

● On-screen data is output only to the [LINE 2 -

SUPER] connector.

● Select the main time code or sub time code to

output VITC with menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUT SELECT>.

● Video parameters can be adjusted. (See page 119.)

CH1/2

CH3/4

OUT

IN OUT

R-Y

B-Y

R-Y

OUT

OFF

LINE1

LINE2

SUPER

RS-232C

COMPOSITE

LINE IN

REF

COMPONENT

COMPOSITE

REMOTE IN (9P)

REMOTE OUT (9P)

VIDEO CONTROL

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

OUT

SERIAL V / ASERIAL V / A

AES / EBUAES / EBU

VIDEO

TIME CODE

AUDIO IN

AUDIO OUT

AUDIO MONITOR

3-3 CONTROL SYSTEM CONNECTIONS

3 CONNECTIONS

[REMOTE IN (9P)]

Connect an editing control for the RS-422 serial interface. Editing controller menu setting switches are available. Menu switch No. 359 <JOG FEELING> Menu switch No. 363 <CONTROLLER SELECT> To control more than one VCR at the same time, set menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> to “ON”.

[RS-232C]

Connect to an RS-232C interface in a personal computer or other control unit.

[REMOTE OUT (9P)]

Connect another VCR with an RS-422 interface. You will be able to control the other VCR from this unit. To control more than one VCR at the same time, connect this connector to a [REMOTE IN] connector of the subsequent VCR.

[VIDEO CONTROL]

Connect an optional TBC remote control to operate the built-in TBC video controls. The RM-G22U cannot be connected. When adjusting with a video controller, press the [VCON] button to select “Remote” and activate the settings. (Refer to “EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT” on page 117.)

Editing remote control connection

● Set the editing timing to -7 frames from the editing remote control.

● The preroll time should be set to 5 seconds or more.

● When using the RM-G820U or RM-G870U editing remote controller, execute the editing controller's learn function before operating. Otherwise, the number of retries will be increased.

● When the RM-G820 remote controller is connected to this unit, set the menu switch No. 317 < 9PIN DEVICE ID > to “JVC D80”. The remote controller’s edit timing is automatically set to -7 frames.

[REMOTE IN (9P)]

[RS-232C]

[REMOTE OUT (9P)]

[VIDEO CONTROL]

D95:525/625 SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525 00A:MENU SETTING

SET+HOLD INITIAL

00B:DIRECT ACCESS

SET+HOLD>ON

00C:USER PAGE

SET+HOLD>INITIAL

00D:MENU LOCK

SET+HOLD>OFF

002:OPERATION LOCK

OFF

003:SYNC SELECT

AUTO

005:AUTO TRACKING

DH:DRUM HOUR METER

0600H

U01 :(FOR USER)

U02 :(FOR USER)

U03 :(FOR USER)

U04 :(FOR USER)

U05 :(FOR USER)

CTL 1:23:45:20

008:CAP LOCK(525)

SW SEL

009:CAP RE-LOCKING DIR.

ACCELERATION

Besides the physical switches on the unit, a selection of MENU switches are provided. These can be displayed on the counter display or a connected monitor. Data set in the MENU switches are stored in the VCR’s built-in nonvolatile memory and are not erased even when the main power is turned off. Also available on the top menu display are the following convenient functions for menu switch setting.

4-1 MENU DISPLAY MODES

● Storing and calling up the current menu switch setting

● Restoring the menu switches to the factory setting

● Calling up the Direct Access group of menu switches which are clustered by function (Direct Access facility)

● Erasing all registered contents on the User Page (User Page facility)

● Menu lock function

The menu display consists of four types of display modes.

● Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu screen. The menu switch Nos. are shown on the counter display. The selected menu switch No. blinks on the on-screen display.

● Turn the jog dial to call up all four modes one after another.

● Press the [MENU] button to restore the usual display.

Top menu display

To select desired menu functions.

● D95: 525/625

Set the video signal system to NTSC or PAL. 525: NTSC signals 625: PAL signals For details, refer to “4-2 VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM SELECTION” on page 30.

● 00A: MENU SETTING

• INITIAL(0) : Set the MENU switches to

the factory settings.

• USER-1 LOAD (1) : Set the MENU switches to

the stored settings in the user memory area.

• USER-1 SAVE (2) : To store the current menu

switch setting in the user

memory area. For details, refer to “4-4 Saving and Calling Up Menu Switch Settings” on page 32.

● 00B DIRECT ACCESS (Direct Access facility)

With this switch set to ON (1), one-touch direct access to a functionally-related group of MENU switches such as SERVO and VIDEO or to the hour meter data or the Menu switches on user page is available simply by pressing the specified button on the control panel. For details, refer to “4-5 Calling Up Functional Menu Switch (Direct Access Functions)” on page 33.

● 00C USER PAGE (user page facility)

Erases all registered menu switch settings. To do this, select this menu function and press the SET and [HOLD] buttons simultaneously.

● 00D MENU LOCK function (menu lock facility)

Locks or unlocks menu switch settings. OFF (0) : Settings can be changed. ON (1) : Locking function is activated and menu

switch settings (except for the top menu) cannot be changed.

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

Usual display

Menu switch setting display

Top menu display

Hour meter data display

Jog dial

User page display

[Counter display]

Usual display

Jog dial

[MENU] button

Jog dial

USER-2 LOAD (3) USER-3 LOAD (5)

USER-2 SAVE (4) USER-3 SAVE (6)

4-1 MENU DISPLAY MODES

● 00E OPTIMUM REC CURRENT function (record-

ing current automatic adjustment function)

To automatically adjust the recording current, select this menu function and press the [HOLD] and [REC] buttons simultaneously. For details, refer to “Recording current adjustment” on page 38.

● 00F FIXED TIME ENTRY

Sets the fixed time cue up point. To call up the setting mode, select this menu and press the [HOLD] button. For details, refer to “Fixed time cue up function” on page 91.

MENU switch setting display

To access multiple menu switch items The menu switches are organized in six functionally related groups.

• SERVO numbered 000

• VIDEO numbered 100

• AUDIO numbered 200

• SYSTEM numbered 300

• TIME CODE numbered 400

• ON-SCREEN numbered 500

• TBC/FRAME MEMORY numbered 600

Hour meter display

Shows the drum running hours.

User page display

Shows the menu switch data registered on the user page.

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

4-2 VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM SELECTION

This unit can be used with either the NTSC or PAL signal systems. The currently selected video signal system is indicated by the 525/625 indicator on the counter display. To change the video signal system, follow the steps below.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

625

525 625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[HOLD] button

[SEARCH] button

[MENU] button

[SET] button

: NTSC : PAL

Jog dial

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

Operation procedure

1. Press the [MENU] button to display the top menu.

2. Turn the jog dial to select “D95: 525/625”.

“D95” is shown on the counter display and “D95” blinks on screen.

3. Hold the [SEARCH] button down and turn the jog dial to select the set value.

Select “525” for NTSC or “625” for PAL.

4. To change the menu switch setting, hold the [SET] button down and press the [HOLD] button.

[ The Normal Display mode is restored.

5. To apply the selected video signal system, turn this unit OFF then ON again.

[ When the power is turned ON, the video signal

system is changed and the corresponding video signal system indicator is shown on the counter display (525 or 625 indicator).

• When a cassette tape recorded on a signal system other than that set for this unit is played back, the corresponding indicator ([525] or [625]) blinks. When the NTSC system is selected and a PAL tape is played back, the [625] indicator blinks. When the PAL system is selected and an NTSC tape is played back, the [525] indicator blinks.

• If required, select the audio reference level (-20 dB/-18 dB) for recording with menu switch No. 257 <AUD. REF. SIGNAL LEV. >. (See page 54.)

Video signal system indicator

[Counter display]

[On-screen display]

D95:525/625

00A:MENU SETTING

SET+HOLD INITIAL

00B:DIRECT ACCESS

SET+HOLD>ON

00C:USER PAGE

SET+HOLD>INITIAL

00D:MENU LOCK

SET+HOLD>OFF

SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525

D95:525/625

00A:MENU SETTING

SET+HOLD INITIAL

00B:DIRECT ACCESS

SET+HOLD>ON

00C:USER PAGE

SET+HOLD>INITIAL

00D:MENU LOCK

SET+HOLD>OFF

SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525

D95:525/625

SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525

00A:MENU SETTING

SET+HOLD INITIAL

00B:DIRECT ACCESS

SET+HOLD>ON

00C:USER PAGE

SET+HOLD>INITIAL

00D:MENU LOCK

SET+HOLD>OFF

002:OPERATION LOCK

OFF

003:SYNC SELECT

AUTO

005:AUTO TRACKING

300:DIRECT EJECT

301:DIRECT SEARCH

302:BACK SPACE

307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME

311:AUTO PLAY

OFF

300:DIRECT EJECT

OFF

301:DIRECT SEARCH

302:BACK SPACE

307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME

311:AUTO PLAY

OFF

008:CAP LOCK(525)

SW SEL

009:CAP RE-LOCKING DIR.

ACCELERATION

5MIN

4-3 MENU SWITCH SETTING

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

[Counter display]

[On-screen display]

Menu switch setting display

Top menu display

Operation procedure

1. Call up the menu switch setting display.

Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu screen on the counter display and on-screen display. When the top menu is displayed, turn the jog dial to show the menu switch setting screen.

● On-screen display data are output through the

rear panel [LINE2-SUPER] connector.

The counter display shows menu switch number.

2. Select a menu switch item to set by turning the jog dial.

● The selected menu switch number blinks on the

on-screen display.

● The menu switch number changes on the

counter display.

3. Select the setting value of the menu switch by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change other items.

4. Press the [SET] button to enter the finalized settings in memory.

● During setting, “SET” blinks on the counter

display and “MENU SET” blinks on the onscreen display. When setting is complete, the normal screen is restored.

Menu switch No.

Set value No.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[MENU] button

[HOLD] button

[SET] button

Jog dial

D95:525/625

00A:MENU SETTING

SET+HOLD INITIAL

00B:DIRECT ACCESS

SET+HOLD>ON

00C:USER PAGE

SET+HOLD>INITIAL

00D:MENU LOCK

SET+HOLD>OFF

SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525

4-4 SAVING AND CALLING UP MENU SWITCH SETTINGS

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

The set menu switch data can be saved and called up with the 00A MENU SETTING item on the top menu display. If you’re going to use the current menu switch setting again later, you can store it in the user memory area. Then, if the setting is changed, you can restore it simply by calling the stored user data. It is also possible to restore the initial factory settings.The menu switch setting can be saved in USER-1 SAVE, USER-2 SAVE or USER-3 SAVE .

Top menu display

Set value

Item No.

[Counter display]

[On-screen display]

300: DIRECT EJECT

301:DIRECT SEARCH

302:BACK SPACE

307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME

311:AUTO PLAY

OFF

Menu switch setting display

300: DIRECT EJECT

OFF

301:DIRECT SEARCH

302:BACK SPACE

307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME

311:AUTO PLAY

OFF

300: DIRECT EJECT

301:DIRECT SEARCH

302:BACK SPACE

307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME

311:AUTO PLAY

OFF

LOAD

Memory

SAVE

Change

Call up

5MIN

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[MENU] button

[HOLD] button

[SET] button

Jog dial

Operation procedure

1. Press the [MENU] button and turn the jog dial to call up the top menu on the on-screen display and the counter display.

2. Select 00A: MENU SETTING.

● Turn the jog dial so that 00A appears on the

counter display and 00A blinks on the on-screen display.

3. Select the saving or calling-up function and execute it.

When restoring the initial factory settings

● Select “INITIAL (0)” by turning the jog dial while

pressing the [SEARCH] button.

● Press the [HOLD] button while pressing the

[SET] button.

[ Factory settings are restored. [ The Normal Display mode is restored.

* The fixed time data is not changed.

To call up the saved menu setting

(Recalling data stored in USER-1 SAVE )

● Select “USER-1 LOAD” by turning the jog dial

while pressing the [SEARCH] button.

● Press the [HOLD] button while pressing the

[SET] button.

[ The saved menu switch setting in “USER-1

SAVE” comes up.

[ The Normal Display mode is restored.

The data stored in USER-2 SAVE or USER-3 SAVE can be recalled using USER LOAD-2 or USER-3 LOAD , respectively.

To save the current menu switch setting

(Storing data in USER-1 SAVE )

● Select “USER-1 SAVE” by turning the jog dial

while pressing the [SEARCH] button.

● Press the [HOLD] button while pressing the

[SET] button.

[ The current menu setting is stored in the user

memory area. The data already saved is updated.

[ The Normal Display mode is restored.

D95:525/624

00A:MENU SETTING

SET+HOLD INITIAL

00B:DIRECT ACCESS

SET+HOLD>ON

00C:USER PAGE

SET+HOLD>INITIAL

00D:MENU LOCK

SET+HOLD>OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/ STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

STAND BY

PREROLL

SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525

Access item Control Information on display

button

TOP menu SW EJECT TOP menu

VIDEO menu SW PLAY Menu SW numbered

100 and 600

AUDIO menu SW PAUSE/ Menu SW numbered

STILL 200

SERVO/SYSTEM STANDBY Menu SW numbered menu SW 000 and 300

TC menu SW REW Menu SW numbered

400

ON-SCREEN menu STOP Menu SW numbered SW 500

Hour meter FF Drum running hours

User menu SW PREROLL Menu switch on the

user page

4-5 CALLING UP FUNCTIONAL MENU SWITCH (Direct Access Function)

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

The Direct Access facility groups menu switches into major functionally related groups such as SERVO and VIDEO for easier access. These groups can be called up directly on the menu display. Hour meter data and User Page menu switches can also be accessed this way. The Direct Access function can be turned on or off with 00B DIRECT ACCESS on the top menu display.

Enabling the Direct Access function

Procedure

Setting

00B

Counter display

Page down function

When menu switches for a function are shown on more than one screen, you can display the menu screen by group with the Direct Access function. Then, each time the operation button corresponding to the same Direct Access function is pressed, the menu screens in the group can be advanced one screen at a time (page down function). (e.g.) When the [PLAY] button is pressed with the Direct Access function set to “ON”, the top screen of menu switch #100 is shown. When the [PLAY] button is pressed again, the next menu screen is shown.

• If the group consists of one screen, the page down function cannot be used.

1. Press the [MENU] button and turn the jog dial to call up the top menu on the on-screen display and the counter display.

2. Turn the jog dial and select “00B DIRECT ACCESS”.

● Turn the jog dial so that “00B” appears on the

counter display and “00B” blinks on the onscreen display.

3. Select “ON (1)” by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.

4. Press the [HOLD] button while pressing the [SET] button.

The Direct Access function is set to ON.

[ The Normal Display mode is restored.

To disable Direct Access, select “OFF (0)” by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button, then press the [HOLD] button while pressing the [SET] button.

Using the Direct Access function.

● Make sure the Direct Access function is set to

“ON”.

1. Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu setting display.

2. Press the corresponding front panel control button, depending on the item. (Refer to the table on the left.)

[ The starting item is shown on the counter

display and the first data appears on the onscreen display, depending on what has been selected. Move the items by turning the jog dial.

Front panel operation buttons

On-screen display

The labels under the front panel control buttons indicate the functions that can be called up with the Direct Access facility.

300: DIRECT EJECT

301:DIRECT SEARCH

302:BACK SPACE

307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME

311:AUTO PLAY

OFF

300: DIRECT EJECT

301:DIRECT SEARCH

302:BACK SPACE

307:PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME

311:AUTO PLAY

OFF

MENU SET

U01:(FOR USER)

U02:(FOR USER)

U03:(FOR USER)

U04:(FOR USER)

U05:(FOR USER)

301:DIRECT SEARCH

U02:(FOR USER)

U03:(FOR USER)

U04:(FOR USER)

U05:(FOR USER)

5MIN

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

4-6 USER PAGE REGISTRATION/CHANGE/DELETE (User page function)

Up to five menu switch settings can be registered on the user page (User Page function). The User Page function allows you to register frequently used menu switches for quicker access when you want to change the settings.

1. Call up the menu switch setting screen.

Press the [MENU] button. [ Call up the menu screen on the counter display

and on-screen display. When the top menu is displayed, turn the jog dial to set to the menu switch setting screen.

2. Turn the jog dial to select the menu switch you want to register.

Menu switch selection is also possible using the “Direct Access function”.

3. Press and hold the [SET] button.

During setting, “SET” blinks on the counter display and “MENU SET” blinks on the on-screen display.

While still keeping the [SET] button pressed (even after the [SET] indication goes out), execute the next operation.

4. When the menu switch setting screen appears, turn the jog dial to access the User Page screen.

*Memo: The User Page screen can be displayed

using the Direct Access function. See page 33.

5. Select the line you want to register on the User Page screen.

While keeping the [SET] button pressed, turn the jog dial to select the line number (U01 - U05) you want to register. [ The line number is displayed on the counter

display; the line number blinks on the onscreen display.

6. Release the [SET] button.

[ The menu switch setting is displayed and the

selected line is registered on the User Page.

7. To register more items, repeat steps 2 through 6.

Registration of up to five items is possible.

8. To end User Page registration, press the [MENU] button. The normal display will be restored.

• When steps 2 through 6 are performed on an already registered line, the new menu switch setting replaces the original line.

• Registered lines on the User Page can be moved. Select the menu switch you want to move and follow steps 3 through 6.

• Items D95,00A to 00E on the top menu and the DH:DRUM HOUR menu switch cannot be registered on the User Page.

• The menu registered on the User Page is reset when the unit is initialized (with menu switch 00A).

Procedure

Registering a menu switch on the User Page

Release the [SET] button.

Hold the [SET] button.

○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○○

Menu switch setting display

User Page display screen

301:DIRECT SEARCH

005:AUTO TRACKING

002:OPERATION LOCK

OFF

U04:(FOR USER)

U05:(FOR USER)

301:DIRECT SEARCH

005:AUTO TRACKING

OFF

002:OPERATION LOCK

OFF

U04:(FOR USER)

U05:(FOR USER)

MENU SET

4-6 USER PAGE REGISTRATION/CHANGE/DELETE (User page function) (con't)

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

Counter display On-screen display

Procedure

Changing the registered menu switch setting

1. Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu display mode.

2. Select the menu switch item to be changed with the jog dial.

● The selected menu switch number blinks on the

on-screen display.

● The menu switch number changes on the

counter display.

3. Select the setting value by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.

● The counter display shows the setting value.

4. To change additional items, repeat steps 2 to 3.

5. Press the [SET] button to register the new setting.

[ During setting, “SET” blinks on the counter

display and “MENU SET” blinks on the onscreen display. When setting is complete, the normal screen is restored.

D95:525/625

SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525

00A:MENU SETTING

SET+HOLD INITIAL

00B:DIRECT ACCESS

SET+HOLD>ON

00C:USER PAGE

SET+HOLD>INITIAL

00D:MENU LOCK

SET+HOLD>OFF

U01:(FOR USER)

U02:(FOR USER)

U03:(FOR USER)

U04:(FOR USER)

U05:(FOR USER)

601: V.BLANK MASK

OFF

301:DIRECT SEARCH

002:OPERATION LOCK

OFF

214:PB V.FADE

340:SEARCH SPEED

X32

U05:(FOR USER)

MENU SET

U01:(FOR USER)

002:OPERATION LOCK

OFF

214:PB V.FADE

340:SEARCH SPEED

X32

U05:(FOR USER)

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

4-6 USER PAGE REGISTRATION/CHANGE/DELETE (User page function) (con't)

Erasing all registered items on the User Page

1. Press the [MENU] button and turn the jog dial to call up the top menu.

[ The top menu screen is shown on the on-

screen display and counter display.

2. Select “00C USER PAGE” on the top menu.

“00C” is shown on the counter display and “00C” blinks on the on-screen display.

3. While keeping the [SET] button pressed, press the [HOLD] button.

[ All registered items on the User Page are

erased and the display returns to the normal display mode.

Erasing registered items one at a time

1. Press the [MENU] button to select the Menu Switch Display mode.

2. Turn the jog dial to access the User Page display and select the menu switch item to be erased.

* The selected menu switch number blinks on the on-

screen display.

* The menu switch number is changed on the counter

display.

3. Hold the [SET] button pressed.

[ During setting, “SET” is shown on the counter

display and on-screen display.

While still keeping the [SET] button pressed (even after the “SET” indication goes out), perform the next operation.

4. Turn the jog dial to move to the other menu switch screen page. Release the [SET] button.

[ The registered item on the User Page is

erased.

5. To erase more items, repeat steps 2 through 4.

6. Press the [MENU] button to finish.

[ The normal display mode is restored.

Procedure

Hold the [SET] button down.

Top menu screen

Check the User Page display.

User Page display

Turn the jog dial.

Menu switch display

Check the User Page display.

Release the [SET] button.

D95:525/625

SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525

00A:MENU SETTING

SET+HOLD INITIAL

00B:DIRECT ACCESS

SET+HOLD>ON

00C:USER PAGE

SET+HOLD>INITIAL

00D:MENU LOCK

SET+HOLD>OFF

D95:525/625

SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525

00A:MENU SETTING

SET+HOLD INITIAL

00B:DIRECT ACCESS

SET+HOLD>ON

00C:USER PAGE

SET+HOLD>INITIAL

00D:MENU LOCK

SET+HOLD>ON

CTL 1:23:45:20

4-7 HOW TO LOCK THE MENU SWITCH SETTINGS (Menu switch lock function)

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

To prevent accidental erasure of menu switch settings, you can lock the menu switch settings. This function is not the same as operation lock.

Top menu display.

Top menu display

Procedure

Activating the menu switch lock function

1. Press the [MENU] button and turn the jog dial to call up the top menu.

[ The top menu screen is shown on the on-

screen display and counter display.

2. Select “00D: MENU LOCK” on the top menu with the jog dial.

“00D” is shown on the counter display and “00D”

blinks on the on-screen display.

3. Select “ON (1)” by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.

4. While keeping the [SET] button pressed, press the [HOLD] button.

[ The menu switch lock function is set to “ON”

and the normal display is restored.

To disable the menu switch lock function, select “OFF (0)” by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button. Then, while keeping the [SET] button pressed, press the [HOLD] button.

When the menu switch lock function is activated, only the top menu settings can be changed. All other settings are locked.

Normal display

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

4-8 RECORDING CURRENT ADJUSTMENT

Thanks to this function, it is not necessary to adjust the recording current each time the tape is changed. When a tape with a different optimum recording current is used, this function allows you to take advantage of this tape’s performance. If automatic adjustment is performed on a tape which has been used many times, its optimum recording current may be quite different from that of a new tape. In this case, perform automatic adjustment using the new tape.

Procedure

Activating the recording current adjustment function

1. Light all [VIDEO INPUT] indicators with the input video signal switch.

2. Select the PB/EE Auto Switching mode with the [PB PB/EE] button.

3. Load a recording tape and engage the Stop mode.

4. Press the [MENU] button and turn the jog dial to call up the top menu.

[ The top menu screen is shown on the on-

screen display and counter display.

5. Select “00E:OPTIMUM REC CURRENT” on the top menu with the jog dial.

• “00E” is shown on the counter display and “00E”

blinks on the on-screen display.

6. While keeping the [REC] button pressed, press the [HOLD] button.

[ Automatic recording current adjustment will

start. It takes several minutes to complete the automatic adjustment.

• To interrupt the adjustment, press the [MENU]

button twice.

• When adjustment is finished, the indication

shown on the left is displayed on the on-screen display.

7. When the indication on the left figure is shown on the on-screen display, press the [MENU] button twice.

[ The previous display mode is restored.

• When the adjustment cannot be completed, the

indication shown on the left is displayed on the on-screen display. In this case, change the recording position or replace the recording tape.

00E:OPTIMUM REC CURRENT

HOLD+REC>START

00F:FIXED TIME ENTRY

00:00:00:00

OPTIMUM REC CURRENT

! ! PERFORM ! ! 10 05

(ABORT > MENU KEY)

OPTIMUM REC CURRENT

! ! END ! ! 10 05

(PUSH MENU KEY)

OPTIMUM REC CURRENT

! ! ERROR ! !

(PUSH MENU KEY)

D95:525/625

SET+HOLD[POWER OFF>525

00A:MENU SETTING

SET+HOLD INITIAL

00B:DIRECT ACCESS

SET+HOLD>ON

00C:USER PAGE

SET+HOLD>INITIAL

00D:MENU LOCK

SET+HOLD>OFF

DH:DURM HOUR METER

0600

[FF] button

[MENU] button [HOLD] button

[FF] button

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

UBDF

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

4-9 HOUR METER DATA DISPLAY

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

Drum running hours can be displayed on the counter display and the on-screen display. Use this information as a guide to choosing the appropriate maintenance interval.

Procedure

1. Press the [MENU] button.

[ The Menu Display mode is engaged.

2. Select the DH display by turning the jog dial.

[ Hour meter data (drum running hours) is

displayed on the counter display and the onscreen display (0000H - 9999 H).

3. To return to the normal display mode, press the [MENU] button.

When the Direct Access function is set to ON, press the [FF] button to accelerate item indication.

Direct Access function number

Drum running hours

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

5-1 MENU SWITCH LIST

Gives the names and brief description of the menu switches. See reference pages for details

Functions enclosed in

are not available on the PAL system.

Functional No Names Description Reference group Page

SERVO 002 OPERATION LOCK Operation mode lock ON/OFF .......................................................................... 43

003 SYNC SELECT Selects the reference sync signal (EXT or AUTO) for the servo system ......... 43

005 AUTO TRACKING Selects automatic or manual tracking .............................................................. 43

008 CAP LOCK (525) Selects the color frame servo sync system ...................................................... 43

008p CAP LOCK (625) Selects the color frame servo sync system ...................................................... 44

009 CAP RELOCKING DIR Selects the color frame servo lock direction ..................................................... 44

VIDEO 104 CPN LEVEL/SETUP (525) Selects Betacam or MII component level ......................................................... 44

111 VD REC SIGNAL SEL. Selects the video signal created by internal generator ..................................... 44

112 ECC MODE Selects level of error correction ........................................................................ 45

119 SLOW PICTURE Selects FIELD or FRAME slow motion playback mode. .................................. 45

120 NO CTL MUTING Selects if the video output mutes when playing back a blank tape .................. 45

124 CHROMA ROTE Selects the output chroma phase reference signal .......................................... 45

128 PB EXTENSION LINE Selects the extension line output during playback ........................................... 45

130 BLANKING WIDTH Selects the H blanking width ............................................................................ 46

133 LINE SETUP (525) Adds setup to composite signals ...................................................................... 46

138 EXTRA LINE REC (525) Selects the video signal that will be recorded on the extra line ........................ 47

139 EXTRA-L R1 SEL (525) Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 1 ..................... 47

140 EXTRA-L R2 SEL (525) Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 2. .................... 47

141 EXTRA-L R3 SEL (525) Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 3 ..................... 47

142 EXTRA-L R4 SEL (525) Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 4 ..................... 47

143 EXTRA LINE PB (525) Selects how extra line information is added during playback ........................... 47

144 EXTRA-L P1 SEL (525) Selects which line to add extra line 1 information ............................................ 48

145 EXTRA-L P2 SEL (525) Selects which line to add extra line 2 information ............................................ 48

146 EXTRA-L P3 SEL (525) Selects which line to add extra line 3 information ............................................ 48

147 EXTRA-L P4 SEL (525) Selects which line to add extra line 4 information ............................................ 48

138p EXTRA LINE REC (625) Selects the video signal that will be recorded on the extra line. ....................... 48

139p EXTRA-L R1 SEL (625) Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 1 ..................... 48

140p EXTRA-L R2 SEL (625) Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 2. .................... 48

141p EXTRA-L R3 SEL (625) Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 3 ..................... 48

142p EXTRA-L R4 SEL (625) Selects the input signal line that will be recorded on extra line 4 ..................... 48

143p EXTRA LINE PB (625) Selects how extra line information is added during playback ........................... 49

144p EXTRA-L P1 SEL (625) Selects which line to add extra line 1 information ............................................ 49

145p EXTRA-L P2 SEL (625) Selects which line to add extra line 2 information ............................................ 49

146p EXTRA-L P3 SEL (625) Selects which line to add extra line 3 information ............................................ 49

147p EXTRA-L P4 SEL (625) Selects which line to add extra line 4 information ............................................ 49

148 IN VBLANK YCOMB (525) Turns Y/C separation ON/OFF for composite signals in the

V. Blanking period ........................................................................................... 49

148p IN VBLANK YCOMB (625) Turns Y/C separation ON/OFF for composite signals in the

V. Blanking period ........................................................................................... 49

149 VIDEO OUT SELECT Selects the timing for output video signals during editing ................................ 50

AUDIO 214 PB V. FADE Enables V fades during playback at the audio edit transitions ......................... 50

215 AUD REC VOLUME MODE 1 Selects audio REC level adjustment as individual channels or stereo pairs .... 50

216 AUD PB VOLUME MODE 1 Selects audio PB level adjustment as individual channels or stereo pairs ....... 51

219 SEARCH REC CH Selects the signal source for recording linear audio tracks .............................. 51

221 SEARCH PB AT 1+3/2+4 Switches the linear track audio ON/OFF during search ................................... 51

222 MONITOR MIX MODE Selects the audio monitor mixing level ............................................................. 51

223 CH3/4 OUT SEL AT 2CH Selects the signal output from the CH3/CH4 audio channels .......................... 52

224 AUDIO IN LEVEL CH1 Sets the audio input reference level for CH1.................................................... 52

225 AUDIO IN LEVEL CH2 Sets the audio input reference level for CH2.................................................... 52

Functional No Names Description Reference group Page

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

5-1 MENU SWITCH LIST

AUDIO 226 AUDIO IN LEVEL CH3 Sets the audio input reference level for CH3.................................................... 52

227 AUDIO IN LEVEL CH4 Sets the audio input reference level for CH4 .................................................... 52

228 AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH1 Sets the audio output reference level for CH1 ................................................. 52

229 AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH2 Sets the audio output reference level for CH2 ................................................. 52

230 AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH3 Sets the audio output reference level for CH3 ................................................. 52

231 AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH4 Sets the audio output reference level for CH4 ................................................. 52

232 AUDIO MON LEVEL LCH Sets the output reference level for the LCH audio monitor .............................. 52

233 AUDIO MON LEVEL RCH Sets the output reference level for the RCH audio monitor.............................. 52

236 PRO 48K S.R.CONV. Enables the sampling rate converter even when the input signal is

a professional 48K AES/EBU signal ................................................................ 52

237 EMBEDDED AUDIO Disables the embedded audio signal from the SDI output signal ..................... 53

247 DIG AUD AT SYNC IN Turns the embedded audio noise ON/OFF when the sync signal is input

from a different system .................................................................................... 53

251 CH3/4 SOURCE SEL. Selects the input source for the CH3 and CH4 audio signals .......................... 53

253 CH1 REC SIGNAL SEL Selects the built-in signal generator’s CH1 audio signal .................................. 54

254 CH2 REC SIGNAL SEL Selects the built-in signal generator’s CH2 audio signal .................................. 54

255 CH3 REC SIGNAL SEL Selects the built-in signal generator’s CH3 audio signal .................................. 54

256 CH4 REC SIGNAL SEL Selects the built-in signal generator’s CH4 audio signal .................................. 54

257 AUD REF. SIGNAL LEV Selects the audio recording reference level ..................................................... 54

261 AUD SEL. AT SEARCH Selects the output audio track during search ................................................... 54

SYSTEM 300 DIRECT EJECT Enables /disables direct EJECT

(accepts EJECT command from any mode) .....

301 DIRECT SEARCH Direct search ON/OFF...................................................................................... 54

302 BACK SPACE Back space edit operation ON/OFF ................................................................. 54

307 PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME Selects duration of long-time pause/still/standby ON....................................... 55

311 AUTO PLAY Auto play operation ON/OFF............................................................................ 55

312 AUTO REW Auto rewind operation ON/OFF ........................................................................ 55

314 PB/EE MODE Selects the modes in which the VCR automatically switches from PB to EE ... 55

317 9PIN DEVICE ID Selects the device type ID returned to a 9-pin remote control ........................ 55

319 FF/REW MAX SPEED Selects the maximum tape speed in FF/REW modes ...................................... 55

320 PREROLL TIME Sets the PREROLL time ................................................................................... 56

323 PREROLL END MODE Selects the mode engaged after preroll operation ........................................... 56

328 EDIT POINT CLEAR Selects whether the edit point data is cleared after performing the edit........... 56

340 SEARCH SPEED Selects the maximum search speed when using the search dial ..................... 56

351 PREREAD Selects the video/audio preread function ......................................................... 56

352 AUD PREREAD TIMING Selects the output audio phase correction during audio preread ..................... 56

357 DIAG AT POWER ON Enables/ disables automatic diagnosis operation at power ON ....................... 57

359 JOG FEELING (REMOTE) Selects the "feel" of an external editing /remote controller's JOG dial ............. 57

363 CONTROLLER SELECT Changes the personality of the VCR to match the type of editing

controller connected ........................................................................................ 57

367 EDIT INTERRUPTION Enables/disables channel condition monitoring during editing ......................... 57

368 STARTING PIC FREEZE Selects video output source (freeze or tape) during servo lock ....................... 57

369 PARA-RUN Enables simultaneous control of multiple VCR's from a single remote ............ 58

371 INPUT SELECT SAFETY Switches ON a safety function to prevent accidental change of input router ... 58 372 P+R AT SWAP MODE Selects whether or not simultaneous operation of the player and

recorder is permitted ....................................................................................... 58

373 MATCH FRAME Switches the match frame mode ON/OFF during swap editing ....................... 58

374 MENU OPEN SAFETY Selects the method for opening the menu switch setting mode ....................... 58

375 AUD EDIT PRESET CH1 Selects the ON/OFF execution command for the (DA-1) Insert mode ............. 59

376 AUD EDIT PRESET CH2 Selects the ON/OFF execution command for the (DA-2) Insert mode ............. 59

377 AUD EDIT PRESET CH3 Selects the ON/OFF execution command for the (DA-3) Insert mode ............. 59

378 AUD EDIT PRESET CH4 Selects the ON/OFF execution command for the (DA-4) Insert mode ............. 59

Functional No Names Description Reference group Page

SYSTEM 381 JOG FEELENG (LOCAL) Selects jog dial operation response level ......................................................... 59

382 9 PIN ID

䡲

---(1ST) Sets the first digit of the ID code ...................................................................... 59

383 9 PIN ID-

䡲

--(2ND) Sets the second digit of the ID code ................................................................. 59

384 9 PIN ID--

䡲

-(3RD) Sets the third digit of the ID code ..................................................................... 59

385 9 PIN ID---

䡲

(4TH) Sets the fourth digit of the ID code ................................................................... 59

386 MUTING AT NO TAPE ON/OFF of the EE signal output when no tape is loaded ................................. 59

387 CF FLAG REPLY (525) Selects the number of fields for which the color frame flag is set for

9-pin remote control ........................................................................................ 60

387p CF FLAG REPLY (625) Selects the number of fields for which the color frame flag is

set for 9-pin remote control ............................................................................. 60

389 MULTI CUE MODE Switches Multi Cue mode ON/OFF .................................................................. 60

390 SWAP VTR SELECT Selects the player VTR type during swap editing ............................................. 60

391 SYNCHRONIZATION Enables/disables the bump mode during swap editing .................................... 60

393 SYNC GRADE Selects the editing accuracy during swap editing ............................................. 60

395 AUTO-EE Selects whether the BR-D92 automatically switches to EE for single monitor

operation during swap editing ......................................................................... 60

TIME CODE 400 VITC LINE-1 SEL (525) Selects the vertical interval line for adding VITC-1 ........................................... 61

400p VITC LINE-1 SEL (625) Selects the vertical interval line for adding VITC-1........................................... 61

401 VITC LINE-2 SEL (525) Selects the vertical interval line for adding VITC-2........................................... 61

401p VITC LINE-2 SEL (625) Selects the vertical interval line for adding VITC-2........................................... 61

402 CTL DF SELECT (525) Sets the CTL counter to operate in NONDROP/DROP frame mode ............... 61

403 REGEN MODE Selects what elements of time the code (TC, UB) are regenerated ................. 61

409 EXT REGEN TC Selects external source (LTC/ VITC) for regeneration ..................................... 62

410 AUTO REGEN MODE Selects the edit mode in which time code is regenerated. ............................... 62

421 TCG CF FLAG Turns the color frame flag ON/OFF for the time code bit ................................. 62

450 SUB TC (VITC) REC Selects whether incoming VITC is recorded onto the Sub-Time Code ............ 62

451 VITC OUT SELECT Selects the VITC time code output source (Main/Sub) time code ................... 62

452 SEARCH LTC Selects whether LTC time code is output in the Search mode ......................... 62

457 UB PRESET AUTO Selects if the user bit data stored in the memory is recorded preferentially ..... 63

ON-SCREEN 501 CHARA H POSITION Sets the horizontal display position of the on-screen data ............................... 63

502 CHARA V POSITION Sets on-screen data vertical display position ................................................... 63

504 INFORMATION SELECT Selects the type of information shown by the on-screen display...................... 63

505 REMAIN ENABLE Enables/ disables the tape “Remaining Time” display indication ..................... 63

512 MUTING/ALARM MESSAGE Selects whether “MUTING” or “CONDITION ALARM” appears on-screen ...... 64

513 EDIT ON SCREEN ON/OFF of edit on-screen display ................................................................... 64

TBC.FRAME 601 V.BLANK MASK Turns the V sync section masking ON/OFF during playback ........................... 64

MEMORY 620 DUBBING LOOP Enables/ disables the Dubbing Loop (multi-gen test) function ......................... 64

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

5-1 MENU SWITCH LIST

Selects the reference sync signal used by the servo system. EXT : Synchronizes with the signal applied to

the[REF] input connector regardless of VCR mode (playback or record).

AUTO : Synchronizes with the signal applied to

the [REF] input connector during playback.The VCR locks to the video input during recording. (If no signal is present on the [REF] connector and video input connector, the VCR synchronizes to an internal clock signal regardless of this menu's setting).

Switches the operation mode lock ON/OFF. Set to ON to lock the VCR in the current mode. When “OPERATION LOCK” is ON, you cannot operate the control buttons, switches, knobs and dials on the VCR or change any menu switch settings other than this menu switch itself. Only the [POWER] switch and the [PHONES LEVEL] adjust knob remain operable.

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

<SERVO> [ ] : Factory setting Functions enclosed in

are not available on the PAL SYSTEM.

Menu SW On-screen Counter

On-screen

No. display display display

002 OPERATION [0] [OFF]

LOCK 1 ON

003 SYNC SELECT 1 EXT

[3] [AUTO]

005

AUTO TRACKING

0 OFF

[1] [ON]

008 CAP LOCK (525) [0] [SW SEL]

12 FIELD 24 FIELD

Selects manual or automatic tracking adjustment in the Play mode.

ON :The tracking value is automatically adjusted

to the optimum position when the Play mode is engaged. The [TRACKING] knob is not operable. When the Automatic Tracking mode is engaged, tracking adjustment takes several seconds. During this time, audio output signals are derived from the linear tracks.

OFF : Tracking can be adjusted manually with the

[TRACKING] knob. When the meter indication is set to “Tracking”, the [TRACKING] button blinks.

Selects the color frame servo sync system for NTSC signals. SW SEL : The color frame servo setting is

determined by the sub panel’s [CF] switch setting.

2 FIELD : The frame servo is set. Color framing is

not executed.

4 FIELD : 4 field color frame servo is executed.

When the contents of a menu item differ for NTSC and PAL, this is indicated after the menu item name by (525) for NTSC and (625) for PAL. With PAL, “p” is shown after the menu No.

Item

Content

Setting

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

008p CAP LOCK (625) [0] [SW SEL]

12 FIELD 24 FIELD 38 FIELD

009

CAP RE-LOCKING

[0]

[ACCELERATION]

DIR.

DECELERATION

104

CPN LEV./SETUP

0 LOW/ON

(525) [1] [HIGH/ON]

2 LOW/OFF 3 HIGH/OFF

111 VD REC SIGNAL 1 COLOR BAR

SEL.

[2] [BLACK]

MULTI BURST

PULSE & BAR

[ ] : Factory setting

Selects the video signal output by the internal signal generator. The selected signal is output in the EE and Record modes.These signals do not conform to the SMPTE standard. COLOR BAR :Color bar is selected. (These are

75% color bar signals). BLACK : Black signal is selected. MULTI BURST : Multi Burst signal is selected. PULSE & BAR : Pulse & Bar signal is selected.

Item

Content

This item should be applied to NTSC signals only. Sets input/output levels for the [Y, R-Y, B-Y] connectors on the rear panel. Sets input/output levels and setup presence. LOW/ON : Sets component signals to MII levels

with setup.

HIGH/ON : Sets component signals to Bcam levels

with setup.

LOW/OFF : Sets component signals to MII levels

without setup.

HIGH/OFF : Sets component signals to Bcam levels

without setup.

<VIDEO>

Setting

Selects the color frame servo sync system for PAL signals. SW SEL : The color frame servo setting is

determined by the sub panel’s [CF] switch setting.

2 FIELD : The frame servo is set. Color framing is

not executed. 4 FIELD : 4 field color frame servo is executed. 8 FIELD : 8 field color frame servo is executed.

Selects the color frame servo lock direction after executing the bump function. If the edit point shifts due to the color frame servo, select + or - to adjust the edit point. ACCELERATION : Moves the edit point in the +

direction (locks in the acceleration direction).

DECELERATION : Moves the edit point in the -

direction (locks in the deceleration direction).

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

112 ECC MODE [0] [NORMAL]

NO CANCEL

2NO

CORRECTION

119 SLOW PICTURE 0 FRAME

[1] [FIELD]

120 NO CTL MUTING 0 OFF

[1] [ON]

124 CHROMA ROTE [0] [CPS]

1 CPN

128 PB EXTENSION 0OFF

LINE [1] [ON]

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

[ ] : Factory setting

Switches the output chroma phase reference for component signals or composite signals. CPS: Varies the phase so that the chroma level is

not changed with the composite vector scope.

CPN: Varies the phase so that the chroma level is

not changed with the component vector

scope. Set this switch when adjusting the chroma phase with the video control.

Sets whether or not the video signal extension line is output during playback.

ON : Outputs the extension line.

When a tape recorded on this unit is played back, all video signal lines are output.

OFF : Does not output the extension line.

Set to this position when playing back tapes not recorded on this unit. *During recording, the following signal lines are

recorded as the EXTENSION LINE. [525]: LINE 20, 21, 22, 263, 282, 283, 284 and

525 (For LINE 282, the second half only)

[625]: LINE 19, 20, 21, 22, 331, 332, 333, 334 and

623 This menu functions only with tapes recorded on this unit. When a tape recorded on this unit is played back on the BR-D80, BR-D750, BR-D92 or BR-D860, the EXTENSION LINE is not played back. For details, refer to page 89.

Item

Content

Setting

Selects the “Field” or “Frame” slow play mode.

FRAME : Outputs a frame picture. FIELD : Outputs a field picture.

Selects the video signal output when a nonrecorded section (NO CTL) of the tape is played back.

OFF : Still picture is output. ON : Black picture is output.

This menu activates or deactivates the error correction circuit (error correction /error conceal). NORMAL : Activates all error correction

circuitry. NO CONCEAL : NO error concealment is applied NO CORRECTION: Neither the error concealment

nor the error correction circuits function.

For details, refer to page 80.

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

130

BLANKING WIDTH

[0] [WIDE]

1 NARROW

133 LINE SETUP 0 OFF

(525) [1] [ON]

[ ] : Factory setting

Selects whether or not setup should be added to composite signals (NTSC only). OFF : Setup is not added. ON : Adds setup.

Item

Content

Setting

Selects the video signal H blanking width. WIDE : H blanking width is set to the blanking

width used by analog video signals.

NARROW : H blanking width is set to the blanking

width used by digital video signals. Use this position for digital video signal dubbing.

Sets the input video signal line whose data will be recorded on the extra line. Selects the fixed line or user-set line.

FIX: Records the information from line 22 onto

extra line-1 and the information from line 284 onto extra line-2 in the Color mode.

USER (COLOR): Records the information from 2

specified lines onto extra line-1

and line-2 in the Color mode. Specify the lines with menu switches No. 139 and No. 140. USER (MONO) : Records the information from 4

specified lines onto extra lines 1

to 4 in the Black and White mode. Specify the lines with menu switches No. 139 to No. 142.

* When a recording is made with this menu switch

set to “USER (MONO)”, extra line data cannot be played back normally on the BR-D50/D51/D52/ D80/D92/D350/D750/D860.

[First setting] No. 139 ... 22 No. 140 ... 284 No. 141 ... 21 No. 142 ... 283

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

138

EXTRA LINE REC

[0] [FIX]

(525) 1

USER (COLOR)

USER (MONO)

139

EXTRA-L R1 SEL

01 11

(525)

11 21

140

EXTRA-L R2 SEL

12 22

(525) 18 273

141

EXTRA-L R3 SEL

28 283

(525) 29 284

142

EXTRA-L R4 SEL (525)

143 EXTRA LINE PB [0] [MUTING]

(525) 1 AUTO

USER SETTING

[ ] : Factory setting

Selects how extra line signal data is added to the playback video signal during playback. MUTING : Line data is not added to the

playback video signal. AUTO : Extra line data is added to the

line selected for extra line

recording. USER SETTING: Extra line data is added to the

four lines specified by the user.

Lines can be selected with menu

switches No. 144 to No. 147.

Item

Content

Setting

....

Sets video signal lines that will be recorded on extra line 1, 2, 3 or 4. It is possible to set each extra line independently.

•No. 139 <EXTRA-L R1 SEL> ... Sets extra line 1.

•No. 140 <EXTRA-L R2 SEL> ... Sets extra line 2.

•No. 141 <EXTRA-L R3 SEL> ... Sets extra line 3.

•No. 142 <EXTRA-L R4 SEL> ... Sets extra line 4. Select 1 line from lines 11 to 22 and 273 to 284 for each extra line.

* Extra lines 3 and 4 are effective only when menu

switch No. 138 <EXTRA LINE REC (525)> is set to “USER (MONO)”.

....

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

144

EXTRA-L P1 SEL

00 10

(525)

11 21

145

EXTRA-L P2 SEL

12 22

(525) 18 273

146

EXTRA-L P3 SEL

28 283

(525) 29 284

147

EXTRA-L P4 SEL (525)

138p EXTRA LINE [0] [FIX]

REC (625) 1

USER (COLOR)

USER (MONO)

139p

EXTRA-L R1 SEL

00 6

(625)

15 21

140p

EXTRA-L R2 SEL

16 22

(625) 18 319

141p

EXTRA-L R3 SEL

33 334

(625) 34 335

35 623

142p

EXTRA-L R4 SEL (625)

[ ] : Factory setting

Sets the input video signal line whose data will be recorded on the extra line. Selects the fixed line or user-set line. FIX : Records the information from line 22 onto

extra line-1 and the information from line 623 onto extra line-2 in the Color mode.

USER (COLOR): Records the information from 2

specified lines onto extra line-1

and line-2 in the Color mode. Specify the lines with menu switches No. 139p and No. 140p. USER (MONO) : Records the information from 4

specified lines onto extra lines 1

to 4 in the Black and White mode. Specify the lines with menu switches No. 139p to No. 142p.

* When a recording is made with this

switch set to “USER (MONO)”, extra line data cannot be played back normally on the BR-D50/D51/D52/D350/D80/D92/ D750/D860.

Sets video signal lines that will be recorded on extra line 1, 2, 3 or 4. It is possible to set each extra line independently.

• No. 139p <EXTRA-L R1 SEL> ... Sets extra line 1.

• No. 140p <EXTRA-L R2 SEL> ... Sets extra line 2.

• No. 141p <EXTRA-L R3 SEL> ... Sets extra line 3.

• No. 142p <EXTRA-L R4 SEL> ... Sets extra line 4.

Select 1 line from lines 6 to 22, 319 to 335 and 623 for each extra line.

* Extra lines 3 and 4 are effective only when menu switch

No. 138p <EXTRA LINE REC (625)> is set to “USER (MONO)”.

Item

Content

Setting

....

Selects the playback video signal line to add signal data recorded on extra line 1, 2, 3 or 4 for output. Effective only when menu switch No. 143 <EXTRA LINE PB> is set to “USER SETTING”.

•No. 144 <EXTRA-L P1 SEL> ... Sets extra line 1.

•No. 145 <EXTRA-L P2 SEL> ... Sets extra line 2.

•No. 146 <EXTRA-L P3 SEL> ... Sets extra line 3.

•No. 147 <EXTRA-L P4 SEL> ... Sets extra line 4.

Select 1 line from lines 10 to 22 and 273 to 284 for each extra line.

* When the information such as time code data is

superimposed on the same line, extra line data is not output.

[First setting] No. 144 ... 22 No. 145 ... 284 No. 146 ... 21 No. 147 ... 283

[First setting] No. 139 ... 22 No. 140 ... 623 No. 141 ... 21 No. 142 ... 334

....

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

143p EXTRA LINE PB [0] [MUTING]

(625) 1 AUTO

USER SETTING

144p

EXTRA-L P1 SEL

00 6

(625)

15 21

145p

EXTRA-L P2 SEL

16 22

(625) 18 319

146p

EXTRA-L P3 SEL

33 334

(625) 34 335

35 623

147p

EXTRA-L P4 SEL (625)

148 IN VBLANK 0 OFF

YCOMB (525) [1] [ON]

2 OFF WITH21

148p IN VBLANK 0 OFF

YCOMB (625) [1] [ON]

[ ] : Factory setting

Selects the playback video signal line to add signal data recorded on extra line 1, 2, 3 or 4 for output. Effective only when menu switch No. 143p <EXTRA LINE PB> is set to “USER SETTING”.

• No. 144P <EXTRA-L P1 SEL> ... Sets extra line 1.

• No. 145P <EXTRA-L P2 SEL> ... Sets extra line 2.

• No. 146P <EXTRA-L P3 SEL> ... Sets extra line 3.

• No. 147P <EXTRA-L P4 SEL> ... Sets extra line 4. Select 1 line from lines 6 to 22, 319 to 335 and 623 for each extra line. * When the information such as time code data is

superimposed on the same line, extra line data is not output.

Selects whether or not Y/C separation is applied to composite signals in the V. Blanking period. OFF : Y/C separation is not applied. ON :Y/C separation is applied. Normally set to

this position.

OFF WITH21: Y/C separation is not applied to the

V. Blanking period and section of line 21.

• To read composite signals containing teletext with a teletext reader, set this switch to “OFF” or “OFF WITH21”.

Item

Content

Setting

....

Selects how extra line signal data is added to the playback video signal during playback. MUTING : Line data is not added to the playback

video signal.

AUTO : Extra line data is added to the line

selected for extra line recording.

USER SETTING : Extra line data is added to the

four lines specified by the user. Lines can be selected with menu switches No. 144p to No. 147p.

[First setting] No. 144 ... 22 No. 145 ... 623 No. 146 ... 21 No. 147 ... 334

....

Selects whether or not the Y/C separation is applied to composite signals in the V. Blanking period. OFF : Y/C separation is not applied. ON :Y/C separation is applied. Normally set to

this position.

• To read composite signals containing teletext with a teletext reader, set this switch to “OFF”.

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

149 VIDEO OUT [0] [NORMAL]

SELECT 1 SYNC DELAY

2A ROLL

214 PB V. FADE 0 OFF

[1] [5M]

2 10M

215

AUD REC VOLUME

[0]

[CH1/CH2/

MODE 1

CH3/CH4]

1 MAS-1 BAL-2/

MAS-3 BAL-4

[ ] : Factory setting

Item

Content

Setting

Selects the video signal output timing during editing. NORMAL : Shifts the position of output video

signals by 4H during editing. Normally, set to this position. *When shifting by 4H, information in

the input signal’s blanking sections may be input to the image area. In such a case, use “SYNC DELAY” or “A ROLL”.

SYNC DELAY : Shifts the sync signal position

during editing, without shifting the output video signals.

A ROLL : Shifts the output video signals by 1

frame during editing.

Selects whether or not the audio V. fade function is used for smoother edited audio transitions during playback.

OFF : The audio V. fade function is disabled. 5M : The audio V. fade function is enabled. Audio

transitions are faded out and faded in for 5 msec. To reduce noise, this position is recommended.

10M : The audio V. fade function is enabled.

Audio transitions are faded out and faded in for 10 msec.

Selects whether the [AUDIO REC LEVEL] controls operate on individual channels or stereo pairs. CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4: Each of the 4 channels can

be adjusted independently with the corresponding [AUDIO REC LEVEL] volume control.

MAS-1 BAL-2/MAS-3 BAL-4: In this mode two

stereo pairs are formed: (CH1,CH2) and (CH3,CH4). Each pair has one Master Record Level and a Channel Balance control. The controls labeled CH1 and CH3 operate as a Master Record Level for their corresponding pair. The controls labeled CH2 and CH4 operate as Balance Controls for their corresponding pair. This menu setting allows changing the recording level without changing the stereo image, or vice versa.

<AUDIO>

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

216

AUD PB VOLUME

[0]

[CH1/CH2/

MODE 1

CH3/CH4]

1 MAS-1 BAL-2/

MAS-3 BAL-4

219

SEARCH REC CH

[0] [CH1/CH2]

1 CH3/CH4 2 CH1+3/

CH2+4

221 SEARCH PB AT [0]

[MUTING OFF]

1+3/2+4 1

MUTING ON

222 MONITOR MIX [0] [AVERAGE]

MODE

RMS

2 ADDITION

[ ] : Factory setting

Item

Content

Setting

Selects whether or not the audio recorded on the linear track is output during search when menu switch No. 219 <SEARCH REC CH> is set to CH1+2/CH3+4. MUTING OFF : Audio is output. MUTING ON : Audio is not output.

Selects the mixing method for the audio channels being monitored. AVERAGE : Low level (arithmetical mean) RMS : Medium level (geometrical mean) ADDITION : High level (simple addition)

Selects the signal source for recording onto the linear audio tracks CH1/CH2 : Records CH1 audio on the linear

track's L channel and CH2 audio on the linear track's R channel.

CH3/CH4 : Records CH3 audio on the linear

track's L channel and CH4 audio on the linear track's R channel.

CH1+3/CH2+4 :Records mixed CH1 and CH3

audio on the linear track's L channel and mixed CH2 and CH4 audio on the linear track's R channel.

Selects the function of the [AUDIO PB LEVEL] volume controls. CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4: Each of the 4 channels can

be adjusted independently with the corresponding [AUDIO PB LEVEL] volume control.

MAS-1 BAL-2/MAS-3 BAL-4: The [AUDIO PB

LEVEL] volume control for CH1 or CH3 operates as a master level control, enabling the audio playback levels of CH1 and CH2 or CH3 and CH4 to be adjusted simultaneously as a stereo pair. The [AUDIO PB LEVEL] volume control for CH2 or CH4 operates as a balance control for its corresponding pair, enabling audio playback balance to be adjusted between CH1 and CH2 or CH3 and CH4.

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

223

CH3/4 OUT SEL

[0] [MUTING]

AT 2CH 1 CH1/CH2

224

AUDIO IN LEVEL

0 –6DB

CH1 1 0DB

225

AUDIO IN LEVEL

[2] [4DB]

CH2 3 –20DB

226

AUDIO IN LEVEL CH3

227

AUDIO IN LEVEL CH4

228

AUDIO OUT LEVEL

0 –6DB

CH1 1 0DB

229

AUDIO OUT LEVEL

[2] [4DB]

CH2

230

AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH3

231

AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH4

232 AUDIO MON 0 –6DB

LEVEL LCH 1 0DB

233 AUDIO MON [2] [4DB]

LEVEL RCH

236 PRO 48K S.R. [0] [AUTO]

CONV. 1 ON

[ ] : Factory setting

Item

Content

Setting

Enables the sampling rate converter even when the input signal is a professional 48K AES/EBU signal.Always ON for digital audio signals conforming to other specifications. AUTO : The sampling rate converter is set to

OFF. Use this position normally. ON : The sampling rate converter is forced

ON. Set to this menu position when the incoming AES/EBU signal cannot be externally synchronized (audio signal is not in sync with video signal).

When audio recorded only on CH1 and CH2 with the BR-D40, BR-D80, BR-D85 or BR-D750 is played back, select whether or not to output this audio on CH3 and CH4 as well. MUTING : Audio is not output. CH1/CH2 : Audio is output. Signals on CH1 are

output to CH3 and signals on CH2 are output to CH4. The audio level meter does not move.

Selects the analog audio reference input level. Sets each of the four channels (CH1 to CH4). –6DB : Sets the reference level to –6dB. 0DB : Sets the reference level to 0 dB. 4DB : Sets the reference level to 4 dB. –20DB : Sets the reference level to –20dB.

Selects the analog audio reference output level. Sets each of the four channels (CH1 to CH4).

-6DB : Sets the reference level to -6 dB. 0DB : Sets the reference level to 0 dB. 4DB : Sets the reference level to 4 dB.

Selects the reference level of the audio output from the rear panel [AUDIO MONITOR] connector.

-6DB : Sets the reference level to -6dB. 0DB : Sets the reference level to 0 dB. 4DB : Sets the reference level to 4 dB.

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Disables the embedded audio signal from the SDI output signal Selects whether or not digital audio signals are output from the rear panel [SERIAL V/A OUT] connector together with the video signals. OFF : Digital signals are not output. ON : Digital signals are output.

Noise will be generated in embedded audio signals if the embedded audio signals are input from a different system than the reference sync signals, or if no reference sync signals are input. This switch allows you to specify whether or not to remove this noise (effective only when the SA-D95 is installed).

NORMAL : Noise is not removed. Normally

set to this position.

NOISE REDUCE : Processes the audio signal to

reduce noise.

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

237

EMBEDDED

0 OFF

AUDIO

[1] [ON]

247 DIG AUD AT [0] [NORMAL]

ASYNC IN 1 NOISE

REDUCE

251 CH3/4 SOURCE [0] [CH3pSW/

SEL. CH4pSW]

1 CH3pCH1/

CH4pSW

2 CH3pSW/

CH4pCH2

3 CH3pCH1/

CH4pCH2

[ ] : Factory setting

Item

Content

Setting

CH3pSW/CH4pSW: CH3 and CH4 audio input

signals are determined by the front panel’s audio signal select buttons.

CH3pCH1/CH4pSW: CH3 audio input signals

come from the same source as CH1 audio

input signals. CH4 audio input signals are determined by the front panel’s audio signal select buttons. CH3pSW/CH4pCH2: CH3 audio input signals

are determined by the front panel’s audio

signal select buttons. CH4 audio input signals come from the same source as CH2 audio input signals. CH3pCH1/CH4pCH2: CH3 audio input signals

come from the same source as CH1 audio

input signals. The CH4 audio input signals come from the same source as CH2 audio input signals.

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

253

CH1 REC SIGNAL

0 SILENCE

SEL [1] [1 kHz SINE]

254

CH2 REC SIGNAL SEL

255

CH3 REC SIGNAL SEL

256

CH4 REC SIGNAL SEL

257

AUD REF. SIGNAL

[0] [–20 dB]

LEV.

1 –18 dB

261 AUD SEL. AT [0] [LINEAR

SEARCH AUDIO]

1 DIGITAL

AUDIO

300 DIRECT EJECT 0 OFF

[1] [ON]

301

DIRECT SEARCH

0 OFF

[1] [ON]

302 BACK SPACE 0 OFF

[1] [ON]

[ ] : Factory setting

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Enables or disables Direct Eject.

OFF : Eject is enabled only in the Stop

(STANDBY ON/OFF) mode. ON :Eject is enabled in any mode.

Enables/disables entering the search mode directly.

OFF : The search/jog dials can be used when the

[SEARCH] or [VAR] button is pressed. ON :Search and jog can be enabled in any mode

except Record.

Enables or disables backspace editing using the Record, Pause and Play buttons.

OFF : No backspacing after Record Pause ON : Backspacing after Record Pause.

When set to OFF, recording will start more quickly than when set to ON. However, transitional picture quality is affected at the start of recording.

Selects audio signals to output from the built-in signal generator. Setting is possible for each channel. SILENCE : No signal 1 kHz SINE : Outputs audio signals with the

frequency of 1 kHz.

Sets the audio reference level during recording. –20 dB : Sets the audio recording reference level to

–20 dB.

–18 dB : Sets the audio recording reference level to

–18 dB.

• The audio level meter reference level indication

changes according to the setting.

Selects audio signals to output during search. LINEAR AUDIO : Outputs linear audio. DIGITAL AUDIO : Outputs digital audio.

• Noise may be heard while the digital search sound is used. This is normal. It is not a malfunction.

Item

Content

Setting

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

307 PAUSE/STILL/ 0 1 SEC

STP/TIME 1 10 SEC

2 30 SEC 31 MIN 42 MIN 53 MIN 64 MIN

[7] [5 MIN]

311

AUTO PLAY

[0] [OFF]

1ON

312 AUTO REW [0] [OFF]

1 ON

314 PB/EE MODE [0] [STOP/FF/

REW]

1 STOP

317 9PIN DEVICE ID 0 JVC D80

[1] [JVC D860/

D92/D95] 2 DVW-A500 3 USER

SETTING

(382-385)

319 FF/REW [0] [x60]

MAX SPEED 1 x32

2 x17

[ ] : Factory setting

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

Selects the mode engaged when the tape reaches the beginning in the REW mode.

OFF : Stop (STANDBY-ON) is engaged. ON :PLAY is engaged.

Selects the mode engaged when the tape reaches the end in the PLAY or RECORD mode.

OFF : Stop (standby-on) mode is engaged. ON : REW is engaged.

When the unit remains in the Record Pause, Still or Stop (Standby ON) mode for a long time, the Tape Protection mode is engaged automatically. This switch lets you determine how long (1 sec. to 5 min.) the unit will remain in one of these modes before the Tape Protection mode is engaged. In the Record Pause and Still modes, the tape is advanced by 1 frame when the selected duration has passed. In the Stop (Standby ON) mode, the Standby OFF mode is engaged.

Selects the modes in which the EE mode is automatically engaged.

STOP/FF/REW : Engages the EE mode in the

Stop, FF and Rewind modes.

STOP : Engages the EE mode in the Stop mode.

Selects the Device Type ID code returned by the VCR after receiving a DEVICE TYPE REQUEST via RS-422 port. JVC D80 : Replies with ID code for the BR-

D750U/D350U/D80U/D50U/D85U and BR-D51U.

*Set to “JVC D80” when using the RM-G820 editing

remote controller.

JVC D860/D92/D95: Replies with ID code for the

BR-D860U/D560U/D92U/D95U.

DVW-A500 :Replies with ID code for the DVW-

A500.

USER SETTING(382-385):Replies with ID code set

with menu switches No.382 to No.385.

Selects the maximum tape speeds in FF and REW. X60: The maximum tape speed is 60 times normal. X32: The maximum tape speed is 32 times normal. X17: The maximum tape speed is 17 times normal.

Item

Content

Setting

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

320

PREROLL TIME

0 0SEC

[5] [5SEC]

15 15SEC

323

PREROLL END

STANDBY-ON

MODE

[1]

[STILL]

328

EDIT POINT

DISABLE

CLEAR

[1] [ENABLE]

340

SEARCH SPEED [

0] [x 32] 1x 17 3x 6

351

PREREAD

[0] [VID-OFF/

AUD-OFF]

1 VID-ON/

AUD-OFF

2 VID-OFF/

AUD-ON

3 VID-ON/

AUD-ON

352

AUD PREREAD

[0] [NORMAL]

TIMING 1 OFF SET

[ ] : Factory setting

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Sets the preroll time when the [PREROLL] button is pressed. The preroll time can be selected from 0 second to 15 seconds.

Selects whether the edit point data is cleared after performing the edit DISABLE : The edit point is not cleared. ENABLE : The edit point is cleared.

Selects whether or not the preread function is activated. Video and audio preread functions can be set independently.

VID-OFF/AUD-OFF :Both video and audio

preread are disabled.

VID-ON/AUD-OFF : Only video preread is

enabled.

VID-OFF/AUD-ON : Only audio preread is

enabled.

VID-ON/AUD-ON : Both video and audio

preread are enabled.

* When using the [REC] button to start

recording, be sure to set this switch to “VIDOFF/AUD-OFF”.

...

Selects the maximum search speed when using the search dial. X32 : Maximum search speed is +/-32 times

normal.

X17 : Maximum search speed is +/-17 times

normal.

X6 : Maximum search speed is +/-6 times

normal.

...

Selects which operation mode is engaged after preroll is executed. STANDBY-ON : Engages the Standby ON mode. STILL : Engages the Still mode.

Selects whether or not to apply correction during audio preread. Correction is based on output audio phase delay set with the audio control menu <AUDIO OUTPUT PHASE>. NORMAL :Does not apply correction. OFF SET : Applies correction to the output audio

phase according to the delay of the connected video device.

Item

Content

Setting

...

[ ] : Factory setting

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

Selects whether or not editing aborts when the audio condition degrades during PREROLL. OFF : Does not stop editing. ON :Stops editing. Error message is shown on the

counter display.

357 DIAG AT [0] [OFF]

POWER ON 1 ON

359 JOG FEELING [0] [TYPE-1]

(REMOTE) 1 TYPE-2

2 TYPE-3 3 TYPE-4 4 TYPE-5

363 CONTROLLER [0] [DEFAULT]

SELECT 1 RM-450

NOT DEFINED

367 EDIT INTER- [0] [OFF]

RUPTION 1 ON (525)

368 STARTING PIC [0] [OFF]

FREEZE 1 ON

Alters the operation “feel” of the connected editing controller's jog dial.

Five settings (TYPE-1 (0) to TYPE-5 (4)) are available.

This menu changes the characteristics of the VCR to match specific types of controllers.

DEFAULT : Normally set to this position. This

position is ready for standard editing controllers.

RM-450 : Set to this position for an editing remote

controller which outputs JOG

commands for synchronization. (e.g.) SONY RM-450 NOT DEFINED - TYPE-7: Not defined.

Selects playback pictures or a still image as the video output until the servo locks.

OFF : A playback picture is displayed. The picture

may be noisy until the servo stabilizes.

ON :A still image is displayed. This changes to

playback video when the servo stabilizes.

Selects whether or not self-diagnosis is executed when the power is turned on.

OFF: Self-diagnosis is not executed. ON : Self-diagnosis is executed. However, if no tape is loaded when the power is turned on, self-diagnosis does not take place. While diagnostics are running (“DIAGNOSTIC” blinks on the screen), you cannot load a cassette. Do not try to forcibly load it. After completion of diagnostics, a warning indication is shown if there is an abnormality. Refer to “Warnings with Indicators” on page 145.

Item

Content

Setting

* When this menu switch is set to “ON” and

playback starts from a still image containing the block noise, still images containing block noise are output until the servo indicator lights.

To avoid this, obtain a clear still image before

starting playback (using the jog dial or frame advance/reverse buttons).

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

[ ] : Factory setting

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Switches ON a safety function to prevent accidental change of input router OFF : Disactivates this function. Signal is switched

when an input switch is pressed.

ON :Activates this function. To change the input

signal selection, press the input switch while pressing the [SHIFT] button.

Selects whether or not simultaneous operation of the player and recorder is permitted by pressing the [PLAYER] and [RECORDER] buttons together during swap editing. ENABLE : Simultaneous operation for the player

and recorder is possible.

DISABLE : Simultaneous operation is not possible.

Before operation, select the VCR with the [PLAYER] or [RECORDER] button.

369 PARA-RUN [0] [OFF]

1ON

371

INPUT SELECT

[0] [OFF]

SAFETY

1ON

372 P+R AT [0] [ENABLE]

SWAP MODE 1 DISABLE

373 MATCH FRAME [0] [OFF]

1ON

374 MENU OPEN [0] [OFF]

SAFETY 1 ON

This setting determines whether or not the automatic match frame function is used. OFF : Match-frame is disabled. ON : Match-frame is enabled. After an edit has been executed, the edit-out points of both the player and recorder are automatically registered as edit-in points for the next edit.

Selects the method for opening the menu. OFF : Pressing the [MENU] button engages the

menu switch setting mode.

ON :Pressing the [MENU] + [SHIFT] buttons

simultaneously engages the menu setting mode.

Allows daisy chaining of several VCR’s via the [REMOTE IN (9P)] and [REMOTE OUT (9P)] connectors, enabling you to control all connected VCRs at the simultaneously.

OFF : Set to this position to control the VCR

independently.

ON :Set to this position for a simultaneous

operation.

Apply this menu setting to all connected VCR's.

Item

Content

Setting

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

[ ] : Factory setting

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

375 AUD EDIT 0

NO DEFINITION

PRESET CH1 [1] [CH1]

2 CH2 3 CH1 OR CH2

376 AUD EDIT 0

NO DEFINITION

PRESET CH2 1 CH1

[2] [CH2]

3 CH1 OR CH2

377 AUD EDIT [0] [NO

PRESET CH3 1 DEFINITION]

378 AUD EDIT 2 CH1

PRESET CH4 3 CH2

CH1 OR CH2

381 JOG FEELING [0] [NORMAL]

(LOCAL) 1 INSENSITIVE

382 9 PIN ID

䡲

---(1ST) 0 0

[15] [F]

383 9 PIN ID-

䡲--

(2ND) 0 0

[1] [1]

15 F

384 9 PIN ID--

䡲-

(3RD) 0 0

[1] [1]

15 F

385 9 PIN ID---

䡲

(4TH) 0 0

[15] [F]

386

MUTING AT NO TAPE

[0] [DISABLE]

1 ENABLE

This mode allows edit controllers that have only two audio channel capabilities to edit all four audio channels. The audio insert edit command is translated using the definition set by this menu to perform CH1 through CH4 edits. NO DEFINITION: Accepts no command. CH1 : Executes insert edit of the channel selected

when the CH1insert command appears.

CH2 : Executes insert edit of the channel selected

when the CH2 insert command appears.

CH1 OR CH2 : Executes insert edit of the channel

selected when the CH1 or CH2 insert command appears.

Selects jog dial operation response level. NORMAL : Normally set to this position. INSENSITIVE : Slower than NORMAL mode.

Sets the ID reply code when menu switch No.317 <9 PIN DEVICE ID> is set to “3: USER SETTING (382-385)”. Specify a hexadecimal 4-digit ID code with these four menu switches (set each digit with each corresponding menu switch). Select hexadecimal digits (0 to F).

...

Even when the PB mode is selected with the [PB PB/EE] button, the EE mode is engaged when no tape is loaded. In this case, this switch is used to select whether the audio and video signals are output or not.

DISABLE : The audio and video signals are output. ENABLE : The audio and video signals are not

output.

Item

Content

Setting

...

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

[ ] : Factory setting

Item Setting Content

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

Selects whether or not the BR-D95U's built-in editor issues capstan bump commands for frame accurate swap editing. DISABLE : The bump function does not operate. ENABLE : The bump function operates. (Set the

preroll time to 5 seconds or more).

Selects the editing accuracy during swap editing. ACCURATE : 0 frame +/-1FRAME : +1 frame +/-2FRAME : +2 frames ROUGH : Rough

387 CF FLAG REPLY [1] [4 FLD]

(525) 2 2 FLD OR

4 FLD

3OFF

387p CF FLAG REPLY [0] [8 FLD]

(625) 1 4 FLD OR

8 FLD

22 FLD OR

4 FLD OR 8 FLD

3 OFF

389 MULTI CUE [0] [OFF]

MODE 1 ON

390 SWAP VTR [0] [AUTO]

SELECT 1 TYPE 1

9 TYPE 9

391 SYNCHRO- 0 DISABLE

NIZATION [1] [ENABLE]

393 SYNC GRADE [0] [ACCURATE]

1 +/-1 FRAME 2 +/-2 FRAME 3 ROUGH

395 AUTO-EE [0] [RECORDER

ONLY]

1 AUTO-EE

Selects whether the BR-D95U automatically switches from Playback to EE for single monitor operation during swap editing. RECORDER ONLY :Disables the auto EE function. AUTO-EE : Enables the auto EE function. When

the player is selected, this unit enters

the EE mode and the player’s output

signals are automatically passed

through and displayed (this function is

useful for editing with only one monitor).

Sets according to the player VCR during swap editing. Normally set to “AUTO”. AUTO :Set to this position when a BR-D95U, BR-

D92, BR-D52 or DVW-A500 is connected.

TYPE 1 to TYPE 9 : Not used.

When color framing lock is applied, the STATUS DATA CF lock bit transmitted from the 9-pin remote connector is set to ON. This switch selects the field unit where the CF lock bit is set to ON.

• NTSC 4FLD :The bit is set to ON with 4-field unit. 2FLD OR 4FLD: The bit is set to ON with 2 or

4-field unit.

OFF : The bit is set to OFF at all times.

• PAL 8FLD: The bit is set to ON with 8-field unit. 4FLD OR 8FLD : The bit is set to ON with 4 or

8-field unit.

2FLD OR 4FLD OR 8FLD : The bit is set to ON

with 2, 4 or 8-field unit.

OFF: The bit is set to OFF at all times.

...

Selects whether or not the multi cue-up function is used. OFF : Multi cue-up function is disabled. The normal

mode is engaged. ON : The Multi Cue mode is engaged. For more information about the multi cue-up function, see page 92.

[ ] : Factory setting

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

400

VITC LINE-1

010

SEL (525)

515

[6] [16]

10 20

400p VITC LINE-1 0 7

SEL (625)

11 18

[12] [19]

13 20 14 21 15 22

401

VITC LINE-2

010

SEL (525)

717

[8] [18]

919

10 20

401p

VITC LINE-2

SEL (625)

13 20

[14] [21]

15 22

402 CTL DF SELECT [0]

[TCG SETTING]

(525) 1 NON DROP

2 DROP

403 REGEN MODE [0] [TC&UB]

1TC 2UB

Selects what elements of time the code (TC, UB) are regenerated. Selects TC or UB in the Time Code Regeneration mode. TC&UB : Regenerates time code and user bits. TC : Regenerates time code only. Preset UB

data are recorded onto the user bits.

UB : Regenerates user bits only. Preset TC

data are recorded onto the time code.

Selects a line in the vertical interval from lines 7 to 22 for VITC time code insertion. Sets the location for the first VITC line, which will be inserted in the vertical interval.

Selects a line in the vertical interval from line 10-20 for VITC time code insertion. Sets the location for the first VITC line, which will be inserted in the vertical interval.

Selects a line in the vertical interval from line 10-22 for VITC time code insertion. Sets the location for the second VITC line, which will be inserted in the vertical interval.

Selects a line in the vertical interval from lines 7 to 22 for VITC time code insertion. Sets the location for the second VITC line, which will be inserted in the vertical interval.

Sets the CTL counter to operate in the NONDROP or the DROP frame mode. TCG SETTING: Non-drop Frame mode is engaged

when the [DF/NDF] switch on the sub panel is set to NDF. If it is set to “DF”, the Drop Frame mode is engaged.

NON DROP : Non-drop Frame mode is

engaged.

DROP : Drop Frame mode is engaged.

Item

Content

Setting

...

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

[ ] : Factory setting

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

409 EXT [0] [LTC]

REGEN TC 1 VITC

410 AUTO REGEN [0] [ASM+INS]

MODE 1 ASM

2 INS 3 0FF

421 TCG CF FLAG [0] [OFF]

1ON 2 AUTO

450 SUB TC(VITC) 0 OFF

REC [1] [ON]

451 VITC OUT 0 SUB TC

SELECT [1] [TC]

2 OFF

452 SEARCH LTC 0 OFF

[1] [ON]

Selects LTC or VITC as the time code source for locking the BR-D95’s built-in TC Generator to an external master TC generator. LTC : The TC generator locks to the LTC data

from the rear panel connector labeled TC IN.

VITC : The TC generator locks to the VITC data

from the rear panel connector labeled VIDEO IN.

Selects incoming VITC or memory preset as the source of the data recorded onto the Sub-Time Code OFF : “00.00.00.00” is always recorded on the sub

time code.

ON :Input VITC is recorded in sub time code.

Selects the source for the VITC TC superimposed on video output signal. SUB TC : Sub time code is delivered to the

output VITC.

TC : Main time code is delivered to the

output VITC.

OFF : VITC is not output.

Selects the edit mode in which time code is regenerated (even if the [PRESET/REGEN] switch is set to “PRESET”). ASM+INS : Regenerates in the Assemble and

Insert modes. ASM : Regenerates in the Assemble mode. INS : Regenerates in the Insert mode. OFF : The setting of the [PRESET/REGEN]

switch is used.

Enables or disables LTC output in the shuttle Search mode. LTC is output from the [TC OUT] connector. OFF : LTC is output only in X1 tape speed.

*LTC is not output in the Program Playback

mode.

ON :LTC is output in all search speed modes.

(Continuous time code is not available).

Item

Content

Setting

Selects whether the color frame flag is set to ON or OFF for a vacant bit in the time code. OFF : Sets the color frame flag to OFF. ON : Sets the color frame flag to ON. AUTO :Sets the color frame flag to ON or OFF

according to the relationship between the video signals being recorded and the color framing of the time code. (See page 106)

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

* If this menu switch is set to “OFF” and menu

switch No. 451 <VITC OUT SELECT> is set to “OFF” or “TC”, the on-screen sub time code indication will not advance in the Play mode. This is the case even when playing back a tape with sub time code recorded.

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

[ ] : Factory setting

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

457 UB PRESET [0] [OFF]

AUTO 1 ON

501 CHARA [0]

H POSITION 6

502 CHARA [0]

V POSITION 11

504 INFORMATION 0 TIME

SELECT [1]

[TIME+MODE]

TIME+SUB TC

TIME+SUB TC +MODE

505 REMAIN ENABLE [0] [DISABLE]

1 ENABLE

When user bit data is TC-preset, the data is stored in memory. Selects whether or not the user bit data is automatically preset based on the stored user bit data when the power is turned on. OFF : The UB auto preset function is disabled. ON : The UB auto preset function is enabled. * When this is set to ON, user bit data from the

9-pin remote controller cannot be preset.

<ON-SCREEN>

Selects the On-Screen data display's horizontal position from 7 possible locations. The factory default position [0] is at the extreme right of the monitor display. The position shifts leftward as the numbers increase.

Selects the On-Screen data display’s vertical position from 12 possible locations. The factory-set 0 position is at the bottom of the monitor display. The position shifts upward as the numbers increase. When menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION SELECT> is set to “TIME+MODE” or “TIME+SUB TC”, the position set with 10 is the same as that with 11. When menu switch No. 504 is set to “TIME+SUB TC+MODE”, the position set with 9 or 10 is the same as 11.

Selects on-screen display data.

TIME : Displays time data only. TIME+MODE :Displays time data and mode data. TIME+SUB TC : Displays time data and sub time

data.

TIME+SUB TC+MODE: Displays time data, sub

time data and mode data.

* A slight delay occurs in the displayed time code

data. Do not dub the on-screen data as it is to a tape for off-line editing.

With these menu switches, the menu switch setting screen changes to the normal onscreen data display. The actual position of the on-screen data display is moved.

Selects whether of not the tape remaining information is displayed on screen. DISABLE : Not displayed. ENABLE : Displayed. For display contents, refer

to page 23.

Item

Content

Setting

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

[ ] : Factory setting

Menu SW On-screen Counter On-screen

No. display display display

512 MUTING/ALARM [0] [OFF]

MESSAGE 1 ON

513 EDIT ON 0 OFF

SCREEN [1] [ON]

601 V.BLANK MASK 0 OFF

[1] [ON]

2 ON WITH

0.5H

620 DUBBING LOOP [0] [OFF]

13 TIMES 25 TIMES 3 10 TIMES

Selects whether “MUTING” or “CONDITION ALARM” messages appear On-Screen.This menu makes it easier to check the VCR’s operation status. The on-screen display is shown on the monitor connected to the [VIDEO MONITOR OUT] connector. OFF : The “MUTING” and “CONDITION ALARM”

are not displayed.

ON :The “MUTING” and “CONDITION ALARM”

are displayed. For more details, refer to the “MUTING/ CONDITION ALARM” display on page 24.

Selects whether the edit on-screen display is ON or OFF during editing. On-screen information is output from the [LINE2 SUPER OUT] connector. OFF : Does not show the edit on-screen display

during editing. ON :Show the edit on-screen display during

editing.

<TBC. FRAME MEMORY>

Enables/disables masking of the vertical interval. OFF : No masking. ON : Masks the vertical interval. ON WITH 0.5H :Masks section for 0.5H in addition

to the vertical interval (analog signals only).

* When this menu is set to “OFF”, only the

recordable sections of the signals output for V. blanking in the EE mode are output (VITC, EXTRA LINE, EXTENSION LINE). When this menu is set to “ON”, VITC and EXTRA LINE have priority in each menu setting (refer to page 89).

Selects whether or not the multi-generation test “Dubbing Loop Function” is used to aid adjusting an analog component system to unity gain. When this mode is active, the VCR automatically switches to its internal color bar generator and continuously builds the number of generations selected. OFF : The dubbing loop function is disabled. 3 TIMES : The dubbing loop function repeatedly

builds 3 generations every few seconds.

5 TIMES : The dubbing loop function repeatedly

builds 5 generations every few seconds.

10 TIMES : The dubbing loop function repeatedly

builds 10 generations every few seconds.

* When set to any setting except OFF (0), this unit

enters the Dubbing Loop mode.

* For more details on the dubbing loop function,

refer to page 122.

Item

Content

Setting

6 PREPARATION

6-1 OPERATION MODE LOCK

This unit is provided with an operation mode lock facility. This function prevents accidental changes to switch and control settings. When this function is ON, currently selected modes and knob or switch positions cannot be adjusted.

● Use menu switch No. 002 <OPERATION LOCK> to enable this function.

● With this function enabled, operation of all front panel control buttons, adjustment knobs, dials and switches is

disabled and changes to menu switch settings are not possible. When this function is activated, it is not possible to change menu switch settings. However, the [PHONES LEVEL] control and menu switch No. 002 <OPERATION LOCK> (to release the operation mode lock function) can be used.

Procedure

1. Make all desired settings and operate as usual.

2. Engage the operation lock function.

Press the [MENU] button to call up the menu setting display.

Turn the jog dial and select menu switch No. 002 <OPERATION LOCK>.

If the Direct Access facility is ON, press the [STAND BY] button to call up the menu item display more quickly.

Select “ON (1)” by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.

Press the [SET] button. The operation lock function is ON. After the SET indication blinks for several seconds, the normal counter and on-screen displays are restored.

3. To cancel the operation mode lock facility, set menu switch No. 002 <OPERATION LOCK> to “OFF (0)”.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[MENU] button

[HOLD] button

[SET] button

Jog dial

[SEARCH] button

Two different sub modes are available in the Stop mode.

Standby ON mode: The tape is loaded and the head drums are rotating, permitting

quick start of operation when another mode is engaged. The [STANDBY] button is illuminated.

Standby OFF mode: The tape is loaded but the drums are stationary. The tape

and the heads are protected against damage in this mode. The [STANDBY] button’s light goes out.

The Output mode in the Standby ON and OFF modes can be selected with the [PB/ EE] button (see notes for details).

Procedure

 Standby ON mode is engaged when the cassette is loaded or when the Stop

mode is engaged with the STOP button.

 To change the Standby ON mode to the Standby OFF mode, press the

[STANDBY] button. [ The [STANDBY] button goes out, indicating that the Standby OFF mode has

been engaged.

 To change the Standby OFF mode to Standby ON mode, press the [STANDBY]

button. [ The [STANDBY] button is illuminated, indicating that the Standby ON mode

has been engaged.

* The Standby ON mode is automatically switched to the Standby OFF mode

after about 5 minutes to protect the tape and the heads. The time when the Standby OFF mode is engaged can be selected with menu switch No. 307 <PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME>.

6 PREPARATION

6-2 STANDBY ON/OFF

Notes

● Output mode selection in the Standby ON/OFF mode

Pressing the [PB PB/EE] button switches between Still output or the EE mode. The counter display changes to “PB” or “PB/ EE”. In the EE mode, the input signal can be monitored.

● When video and audio signals are output from the built-in signal generator;

To output video signals from the signal generator, press the [VIDEO INPUT] button so that all [VIDEO INPUT] indicators light. Select the video signal type from the signal generator with menu switch No. 111 <VD REC SIGNAL SEL.>.

To output audio signals (1 kHz, sine wave) from the signal generator, set menu switches No. 253 to No. 256 <CH1 to 4 REC SIGNAL SEL.> to “1 kHz SINE” and press the audio signal select buttons to select the required channels. The corresponding [AUDIO INPUT] indicators will light.

● In the PB mode, pressing the [REC] button allows you to monitor the input signal. Pressing the [STOP] button restores the Play mode.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[STANDBY] button

[PB PB/EE] button

6 PREPARATION

6-3 LOADING AND UNLOADING THE CASSETTE

Loading the cassette

1. Turn the [POWER] switch on.

[ The counter display is illuminated.

* If a cassette is not loaded, the counter display indicates “No Tape” and the

on-screen display indicates “NO TAPE”. These are not shown when setting the menu switches.

2. Load the cassette.

If tape tension is slack, tighten it before inserting the cassette. Insert the cassette with the cassette label facing you. Press the center of the cassette gently until the loading mechanism takes over. [ The cassette is automatically drawn into the slot and the [STOP] button

lights. When the cassette is fully loaded, the Standby ON mode is engaged and the [STANDBY] button lights.

*When a cassette tape with the REC switch set to OFF is loaded, “REC Inh” is

shown on the tape counter display for about 2 seconds.

Unloading the cassette

1. Press the [EJECT] button.

[ The cassette is ejected.

The CTL counter is reset.

2. Remove the cassette from the slot.

Precautions

● Do not insert anything other than a cassette into the slot.

● Do not try to remove the cassette once automatic cassette loading has begun.

Wait until loading is complete, then press the [EJECT] button.

Notes

● To call up the on-screen display, set the [ON SCREEN] switch on the sub panel to “ON”. Onscreen data are output through the rear panel [LINE2-SUPER] connector.

● Be sure to use only

cassette tapes. VHS/S-VHS cassettes cannot be used.

● Conditional EJECT operation When menu switch No. 301 <DIRECT EJECT> is set to “OFF (0)”, the [EJECT] button is enabled only in the Standby ON or OFF mode. With this switch set to “ON (1)”, tapes can be ejected in any mode.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[EJECT] button

[POWER] switch

7 RECORDING

7-1 PREPARATION FOR RECORDING

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

CONDITION

CTL

REMOTE

16:9

GEN

525 625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

Counter mode indicators

When recording wide aspect screen ID (menu switch No. 103)

Front panel switch setting

1. Select the input video signal.

2. Select the input audio signal.

3. Select the audio monitor output.

Select the audio monitor output from the rear panel [AUDIO MONITOR OUT] connectors or the front panel [PHONES] jack.

For details of steps 1 to 3, refer to page 70.

4. Set the tape counter mode.

Set the time data to be shown on the counter display and on-screen display. “CTL”, “TC” or “UB” will be shown on the counter display.

5. Engage the Remote mode.

To operate this unit locally, press the [REMOTE]

button so that the “REMOTE” indicator on the counter display goes out.

Menu switch setting

Set the menu switches as required.

● Video items

Reference sync signal items

• Select the reference sync system.

No. 003 <SYNC SELECT> ..... Page 43

Set to “EXT” to synchronize with an external sync signal.

● Video items

• Wide aspect ID signal selection No. 103 <WIDE ASPECT ID REC> ... Page 44

• Component video input level selection (NTSConly) No. 104 <COMPONENT LEVEL> ... Page 44

• Recording a signal from the built-in signal

generator No. 111 <VD REC SIGNAL SEL.> ... Page 44 Select a color bar signal, black picture, multi burst

or pulse & bar.

For time code and editing settings, refer to “10. HOW TO USE THE TIME CODE” and “11. EDITING”.

* This unit cannot be used for sound-on-sound

editing. Inserted audio signals are delayed.

● Audio items

• Audio recording level adjustment mode selection No. 215 <AUD REC VOLUME MODE 1> For details, refer to page 50.

• Search audio recording selection

No. 219 <SEARCH REC CH> ..... Page 51

Select the type of audio to be recorded on the cue track (2 tracks).

• Audio monitor output mode selection

No. 222 <MONITOR MIX MODE> ..... Page 51

Select the way mixed audio is output from the [AUDIO MONITOR OUT] connectors or [PHONES] jack.

• Input audio level selection (by channel from 1 to 4) No. 224 to No. 227 <AUDIO INPUT LEVEL CH 1–4> ... Page 52 Select the audio input level of the rear panel [AUDIO IN] connectors from “+4 dB”, “0 dB”, “-6 dB” and “-20 dB” for each channel.

● Record pause selection

• Backspacing selection

No. 302 <BACKSPACE> .... Page 54

● Set the relationship between the serial digital video signal input and AES/EBU input

(Only when the optional SA-D95U digital inter-

face board is installed)

• To input asynchronous professional 48 kHz AES/

EBU signal No. 236 <PRO 48K S.R.CONV.> ... Page 52 Set to “AUTO” to input a serial digital audio signal with professional 48 kHz sampling frequency from a source unit which cannot be genlocked.

REMOTE indicator (when using the remote control unit)

When this unit is synchronized externally

CH1

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

CH1

CH2 CH3

CH4

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

7 RECORDING

7-2 INPUT VIDEO AND AUDIO SIGNAL SELECTION

The video and audio input signal select method is different depending on the setting of menu switch No. 371 <INPUT SELECT SAFETY>. The procedure when menu switch No. 371 <INPUT SELECT SAFETY> is set to “OFF” is described below.

● When the [AUDIO MONITOR] button is illuminated, the audio channel indicator can be used to select the audio monitor signal. The orange “L” and “R” indicators show the audio monitor output connectors.

● The input source for CH3 and CH4 audio signals can be selected with menu switch No. 251 <CH3/4 SOURCE SEL.>.

● When the SDI, AES/EBU, and ANALOG indicators are lit, audio signals from the built-in signal generator are recorded. Select audio signals from the built-in signal generator with menu switches No. 253 to 256 <CH1 to 4 REC SIGNAL SEL.>.

 Input video signal selection

Select the signal from rear panel video input connector or built-in signal generator.

1. Press the [VIDEO INPUT] button to select the video signal.

The [VIDEO INPUT] indicator corresponding to the pressed button lights.

SIF : Input a serial digital video signal to the rear panel [SERIAL V/A IN]

connector (effective only when the optional SA-D95U digital interface board is installed).

LINE :Input composite video signals to the rear panel [COMPOSITE LINE IN]

connector. CPN : Input component video signals to the rear panel [COMPONENT IN] connector. SIF, LINE, CPN lit simultaneously: Records a color bar, black picture, multi

burst or pulse & bar from the built-in signal generator (select with menu

switch No. 111 <VD REC SIGNAL SEL.>). Blinking : The indicator blinks if no signal is input or if the wrong type of signal is

input.

When composite monochrome signals are input, use the COMPONENT Y input, not the

LINE input. This will minimize degradation during signal processing. In this case, set menu switch No. 104 <CPN LEV./SETUP> to “HIGH/ON” or “HIGH/OFF” in the [525] mode.

● Changing the video and audio input signal select method

Set menu switch No. 371 <INPUT SELECT SAFETY> to “ON (1)” to prevent the setting from being changed accidentally. When set to “ON (1)”, the input signal select methods are as follows.

• Video signal: Press the

[VIDEO INPUT] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button.

• Audio signal: Press the audio

signal select button while pressing the [SHIFT] button.

VIDEO INPUT indicator

[VIDEO INPUT] button

Audio input connector names

[AUDIO INPUT] button

Audio channel indicators

Audio signal select buttons

 Input audio signal selection

This unit is provided with independent four-channel input connectors for analog audio, serial digital audio (AES/EBU), and SDI audio. Select the audio signal to be recorded on each of the four audio channels (1to 4).

1. Press the [AUDIO INPUT] button so that the [AUDIO INPUT] button is illuminated.

● When the [AUDIO INPUT] button is illuminated, the audio channel indicator can be used to select input audio signal.

2. Select the audio signal to be recorded on each of four audio channels (1 to 4) by pressing the audio signal select button.

The channel indicator of the selected audio signal lights.

AUDIO

INPUT

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

ANALOG

Notes:

• Audio can only be input to the [AES/EBU] or [SERIAL V/ A] connectors when the optional SA-D95U digital interface board is installed.

• Always input external sync signals when inputting digital signals. Both video and audio must be synchronized with the external sync signal.

(Illustrated example)

• The first audio channel on the tape: Audio to the [AES/EBU CH1] connectors is recorded.

• The second audio channel on the tape: Audio to the [AUDIO IN CH2] connectors is recorded.

• The third audio channel on the tape: Audio to the [SERIAL V/A IN] connectors is recorded.

• The fourth audio channel on the tape: Audio to the [AUDIO IN CH4] connectors is recorded.

● The channel indicator blinks if the selected signal does not conform to the standard.

CH1

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

CH1

CH2 CH3

CH4

7 RECORDING

7-3 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT SIGNAL SELECTION

Select the audio to be output to the headphones jack or the rear panel [AUDIO MONITOR L/R] connectors. Select a single channel or mixed audio from the four available channels. During playback, select the playback audio monitor output signal.

1. Press the [AUDIO MONITOR] button so that the [AUDIO MONITOR] button is illuminated.

● When the [AUDIO MONITOR] button is illuminated, the audio channel indicator can be used for the audio monitor output signal.

2. Select the audio monitor output signal by pressing the audio signal select button.

Select the audio signal from CH 1 to CH 4 to be output to the L and R channels of the [AUDIO MONITOR] connectors and the headphones jack.

The selected channel indicator lights.

[AUDIO MONITOR] button

L channel

R channel

Channel indicators

Audio signal select buttons

AUDIO

MONITOR

● Select the output level mode for audio monitor mixing output with menu switch No. 222 <MONITOR MIX MODE>.

● Setting the audio monitor output level

Set the audio monitor L

and R channel output levels to +4 dB, 0 dB or +6 dB with menu switches No. 232 and No. 233.

(Illustrated example)

● L channel of the [AUDIO MONITOR] connectors and headphones: Output mixed audio of the first, second and fourth channels.

● R channel of the [AUDIO MONITOR] connectors and headphones: Output the audio from the third channel.

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

ANALOG

● When the [AUDIO INPUT] button is illuminated, the channel indicator can be used to select the input audio signal.

● The recording level of this unit can be adjusted either fixedly or manually. To adjust the recording level, pull out the [REC] volume controls to engage the Manual mode and push in them to engage the Fixed (Unity) mode. Either mode can be selected independently for each audio channel.

Fixed recording level adjustment

Push in the [REC] volume controls to engage the Unity mode for recording level adjustment.

● In the Unity mode, the [R] indicator on the upper section of the meter lights. This means that adjustment is not possible with the [REC] volume controls.

Manual recording level adjustment

● Pull out the [REC] volume controls to engage the Manual mode for recording level adjustment.

In the Manual mode, the [R] indicator on the upper section of the meter goes out.

There are two ways to adjust recording levels manually.

Adjust the audio level for each channel independently with the CH1 to CH4 [REC] volume controls.

Use CH1 and CH2 [REC] volume controls as one pair and CH3 and CH4 [REC] volume controls as one pair. Adjust the audio level with the CH1 and CH3 [REC] volume controls as a master volume control and the CH2 and CH4 [REC] volume controls as a balance control.

Select the adjustment mode with menu switch No. 215 <AUD REC VOLUME MODE 1>.

 Menu switch setting

● Select the manual recording level adjustment mode with menu switch No. 215

<AUD REC VOLUME MODE 1>.

“CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (0)”: To independently adjust the recording level for each

channel with CH1 to CH4 [REC] volume controls.

“MAS-1 BAL-2/,MAS-3 BAL-4 (1)”: Use CH1 and CH3 [REC] volume controls for

master volume control and the CH2 and CH4 [REC] volume controls for balance control.

7 RECORDING

7-4 AUDIO RECORD LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

● Recording level adjustment in the Standby mode is possible in the EE mode.

● During recording or audio level adjustment, audio can be monitored via the rear panel [AUDIO MONITOR] connectors or the front panel [PHONES] jack. For monitor output, refer to page 70.

● When menu switch No. 215 [AUD REC VOLUME MODE1] is set to “MAS-1 BAL-2/MAS-3 BAL-4”, the master level adjust and balance adjust functions assigned to each volume control are enabled even if the corresponding channel is in the Unity mode.

● The audio reference level can be set with menu switch No. 257 <AUD REF. SIGNAL LEV.> (-20 dB or

-18 dB).

● Audio signal recording level can be adjusted.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[REC] volume controls

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

OVER

–60

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–40

–30

–20

–10

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

OVER

–2

–4

OVER

–2

–4

OVER

–2

–4

OVER

–2

–4

7 RECORDING

7-4 AUDIO RECORD LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

1. Set the [CH4/TRACKING] meter to audio level.

• When the [METER MODE TRACKING] button is illuminated, press the [METER MODE TRACKING] button.

[ The [METER MODE TRACKING] button goes out and the [CH4/TRACKING]

meter can be used for the CH4 audio level.

2.  Adjust the recording level for each channel (CH1 to CH4) separately with the [REC] volume control.

• To perform fine adjustment, press the [METER MODE FINE] button.

[ The [METER MODE FINE] button is illuminated and the audio

level meter shows the fine level around -20 dBFS or -18 dBFS.

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

Fine mode level indicationNormal mode level indication

• The reference input level shown by the audio level meter is -20 dBFS or

-18 dBFS.

 Adjust with the master and balance controls

The CH1 and CH2 [REC] volume controls, and the CH3 and CH4 [REC]

volume controls work as one set.

The CH1 and CH3 [REC] volume controls serve as master volume control and

the CH2 and CH4 volume controls as balance control.

• Turn the CH1 or CH3 [REC] volume control. The audio on CH2 or CH4 changes along with CH1 or CH3.

• Turn the CH2 or CH4 [REC] volume control to adjust the balance between CH1 and CH2 or CH3 and CH4.

Pair Pair

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

Master volume control

Balance control

Master volume control

● The audio level meter’s reference level indication changes depending on the setting of menu switch No. 257 <AUD REF. SIGNAL LEV.> (-20 dB or -18 dB).

1. Turn the [POWER] switch “ON”.

2. Load the cassette.

Make sure that the protective slide on the cassette is set to “REC”. [ The tape is loaded and the “STANDBY” button lights.

3. Adjust the audio signal recording level.

(See page 69 for audio recording level adjustment.)

4. Start recording.

Press the [PLAY] buttons while pressing the [REC] button. [ The [REC] and [PLAY] buttons light and recording starts.

5. To temporarily stop recording

Press the [PAUSE/STILL] button. [ The [PAUSE/STILL] button lights and recording is paused.

6. To re-start recording

Press the [PLAY] button. [ The [PAUSE/STILL] button goes out and recording starts again.

7. To end recording

Press the [STOP] button. [ The [REC] and [PLAY] buttons indicators go out and the tape stops.

The Standby ON mode is automatically engaged when the tape ends.

● When menu switch No. 312 <AUTO REW> is “ON (1)”, the tape is automatically rewound to the beginning.

Notes

● Be sure to use only cassette tapes.

VHS/S-VHS cassettes cannot be used.

● Recording the video signal

by the internal signal generator Select the color bar signal, black picture multi burst or pulse & bar signal with menu switch No. 111 <VD. REC SIGNAL SEL.> and press the [VIDEO INPUT] button so that all [VIDEO INPUT] indicators light.

● Refer to “10 HOW TO USE

THE TIME CODE” for time code recording.

If menu switch No. 351 <PRE READ> is set to “ON”, the Record mode cannot be engaged. For recording, set it to “OFF”.

* Even if the frame is advanced periodically in the Record-Pause mode (every 5 minutes

or so), the mode will still disengage after about 20 minutes to protect the heads and the VCR will automatically enter the Standby Off mode. You can specify the length of time that elapses before the frame is advanced in the Record-Pause mode with menu switch No. 307 <PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME>.

● When the Play mode is switched to the E-E mode, the picture slightly shifts downward for a moment. However, the recording is not affected.

7 RECORDING

7-5 BASIC RECORDING OPERATIONS

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

4,6

7 RECORDING

7-6 DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT

 This unit does not execute emphasis recording.

When digital audio signals containing emphasis information are input to this unit, this unit automatically de-emphasizes these signals before recording. The emphasis function is always OFF when digital audio signals are recorded on this unit.

 A sampling rate converter is provided for the BR-D95U’s AES/EBU input. This

enables input of both professional-standard and consumer-standard digital signals with sampling frequencies of 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 32 kHz. However, the following signals are muted and cannot be recorded. In this case, the [AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR SELECT] indicator blinks.

• Professional mode, CCIT J17

• Consumer mode, data mode ON

• Consumer mode, 4-channel mode

Note:

• Analog or digital audio output may not be clear when a tape whose audio has been recorded on its audio channels with emphasis both ON and OFF is played back on the BR-D85U/D80U/D51U/D50U/D750U/D350U DIGITAL S VCR.

 Digital audio signal output status bit

The sampling rate converter converts the digital audio signal output status bit from this unit to professional mode signals with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz and emphasis OFF regardless of the type of input signals.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

CONDITION

CTL

REMOTE

GEN

525 625

8 PLAYBACK

8-1 PREPARATION FOR PLAYBACK

Front panel switch setting

1. Select the audio monitor output.

Select the audio monitor output from the rear panel [AUDIO MONITOR OUT] connectors or the front panel [PHONES] jack.

• For the selection procedure, refer to “Audio monitor output selection” on page 70.

2. Set the tape counter mode.

Set the time data to be shown on the counter display and the on-screen display. “CTL”, “TC” or “UB” will be shown on the counter display.

3. Engage the Remote mode.

To operate this unit locally, press the [REMOTE] button so that the [REMOTE] indicator on the counter display goes out. To operate this unit via the RS-422 or RS-232C serial remote interface, press the [REMOTE] button so that the [REMOTE] indicator lights.

Menu switch setting

Set the menu switches as required.

● Reference sync signal items

• Select the reference sync system.

No. 003 <SYNC SELECT> ..... Page 43

Set to “EXT” to synchronize with an external sync

signal.

● Tracking adjustment selection

• Auto tracking/manual tracking selection

No. 005 “AUTO TRACKING” .... Page 43

● Video items

• Component video output level selection (NTSC only) No. 104 <CPN LEV./SETUP (525)> ... Page 44

• Error correction mode selection No. 112 <ECC MODE> ... Page 45

Counter mode indicators

● Audio items

• Audio V. fade function selection Select whether audio noise in transitions should

be reduced or not.

No. 214 <PBV. FADE> ..... Page 50

• Audio output level adjustment mode selection Select automatic or manual adjustment. No. 216 <AUD PB VOLUME MODE 1> ... Page 51

• Set the output to CH3 and CH4 when playing back a tape with two-channel audio (CH1 and CH2). No. 223 CH3/4 OUT SEL AT 2CH ... Page 52

• Audio output level setting Select the reference output level for the audio output connectors (CH1 to CH4 ) from +4 dB, 0 dB and -6 dB. No. 228 to No. 231 <AUDIO OUT LEVEL CH1 — CH4> ... Page 52

• Audio monitor output level setting Select the reference output level for the L and R

audio monitor output channels from +4 dB, 0 dB and -6 dB. No. 232 to No. 233 <AUDIO MON LEVEL LCH — RCH>

● Auto Play mode selection Set whether the tape is automatically played back from the beginning or not.

● Output picture selection when playback starts Select the output picture that will be displayed until the servo has stabilized after starting play back. No. 368 <STARTING PIC FREEZE> ... Page 57

● Setting the video signal vertical blanking period masking

No. 601 <V. BLANK MASK> ..... Page 64

When this unit is synchronized externally

REMOTE indicator (when using the remote control unit)

8-2 BASIC PLAYBACK OPERATIONS

8 PLAYBACK

1. Turn the [POWER] switch “ON”.

2. Load the cassette.

[ When the tape is loaded, the [STANDBY] button lights to indicate that the

Standby ON mode has been engaged.

* Be sure to use only DIGITAL S cassette tapes. VHS/S-VHS cassettes cannot

be used.

3. Start playback.

Press the [PLAY] button. [ The [PLAY] button indicator lights and playback starts. The [SERVO]

indicator lights and the picture stabilizes.

• If menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING> is set to “ON (1)”, tracking is automatically adjusted. As a result, it takes several seconds for the picture to stabilize after the [SERVO] indicator lights.The [SERVO] indicator blinks until the servo stabilizes.

• The [525] or [625] indicator blinks on the counter display if you try to play back a tape not recorded in the same signal system as the one set for this unit.

4. To temporarily stop playback

Press the [PAUSE/STILL] button. [ The [PAUSE/STILL] button lights and the Still mode is engaged.

5. To re-start playback

Press the [PLAY] button. [ The [PAUSE/STILL] button goes out and playback resumes.

6. To stop playback

Press the [STOP] button. [ The [PLAY] button indicator goes out and the tape stops.

When the [STANDBY] button is pressed, the [STANDBY] button goes out and the Standby OFF mode is engaged.

The Standby ON mode is automatically engaged when the tape ends. If menu switch No. 312 <AUTO REW> is “ON (1)”, the tape is automatically rewound to the beginning.

To monitor input signal during playback

The input signal (both video and audio) can be monitored for as long as the [REC] button is kept pressed during playback.

Please note that the Record mode is engaged if the [PLAY] button is pressed together with the [REC] button.

Notes

● Masking the video signal vertical blanking period If menu switch No. 601 <V. BLANK MASK> set to “ON (1)” or “ON WITH

0.5H (2)” the signal superimposed on the vertical blanking period will not be output. However, VITC or Extra line data will be output.

● Tracking adjustment For manual tracking

adjustment, set the menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING> to “OFF (1)”. The [TRACKING] button blinks when the level meter section shows the tracking meter.

● Output picture selection when playback starts

Select the picture that will be output until the capstan servo and drum servo stabilize after playback starts with menu switch No. 368 <STARTING PIC FREEZE>. When this menu switch is set to “ON”, the freeze picture displayed before playback starts is output. Once the servo is stabilized, output automatically switches to the playback picture.

● Play back the section of tape where control signals have not been recorded and set the picture output with menu switch No. 120 <NO CTL MUTING>. “OFF”: A freeze picture is

output.

“ON”: A black picture is

output.

* Even if the frame is advanced

periodically in the Still mode (every 5 minutes or so), the still mode will disengage after about 20 minutes to protect the heads and the VCR will automatically enter the Standby Off mode. The time that elapses until the frame is advanced can be selected with menu switch No. 307 <PAUSE/STILL/STP TIME>.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[REC] button

3,5

[SERVO] indicator

●

Reference output level selection for the audio output connectors

Select the playback

audio output reference level for each channel from +4 dB, 0 dB and

-6 dB with menu switch No. 228 to 231.

8 PLAYBACK

8-3. AUDIO PLAYBACK LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

● Playback levels can be adjusted either fixedly or manually. To adjust the audio playback level, pull out the [PLAY] volume controls to engage the Manual mode or push them in to engage the Unity mode. Either mode can be selected independently for each audio channel.

Audio Playback Level Lock mode

Push in the [PLAY] volume controls to engage the Unity mode for playback level adjustment.

● In the Unity mode, the [P] indicator on the upper section of the meter lights. This means that adjustment is not possible with the [PLAY] volume controls.

Manual audio playback level adjustment

Pull out the [PLAY] volume controls to engage the Manual mode for playback level adjustment. In the Manual mode, the [P] indicator on the upper section of the meter goes out.

There are two ways to adjust playback level manually.

Adjust the audio level for each channel independently with the CH1 to CH4 [PLAY] volume controls.

Use CH1 and CH2 [PLAY] volume controls as one pair and CH3 and CH4

[PLAY] volume controls as one pair. Adjust audio levels using the CH1 and CH3 [PLAY] volume controls as a master volume control and the CH2 and CH4 [PLAY] volume controls as a balance control.

Select the adjustment mode with menu switch No. 216 <AUD PB VOLUME MODE 1>.

 Menu switch setting

• Select the manual playback level adjustment mode with menu switch No. 216

<AUD PB VOLUME MODE 1>. “CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 (0)”: To independently adjust the playback level for each

channel with the CH1 to CH4 [PLAY] volume controls.

“MAS -1 BAL2/MAS-3 BAL-4 (1)”: Use CH1 and CH3 [PLAY] volume controls

for master volume control and the CH2 and CH4 [PLAY] volume controls for balance

control. The [PB UNITY] indicator goes out and the Manual Playback Level Adjustment mode is engaged.

● Audio signal output levels can be adjusted.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[PLAY] volume controls

●

Selecting signals for output from the CH3 CH4 audio connectors

When playing back a tape recorded on a 2-channel DIGITAL S VCR, use menu switch No. 223 <CH3/4 OUT SEL AT 2CH> to specify whether or not these signals are output from the audio CH3/CH4 connector.

● When menu switch No. 216 [AUD PB VOLUME MODE1] is set to “MAS-1 BAL-2/MAS-3 BAL-4”, the master level adjust and balance adjust functions assigned to each volume control are enabled even if the corresponding channel is in the Unity mode.

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

OVER

–60

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–40

–30

–20

–10

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

OVER

–2

–4

OVER

–2

–4

OVER

–2

–4

OVER

–2

–4

8 PLAYBACK

1. Set the [CH4/TRACKING] meter to audio level.

• When the [METER MODE TRACKING] button is illuminated or blinked, press the [METER MODE TRACKING] button.

[ The [METER MODE TRACKING] button goes out and the

[CH4/TRACKING] meter can be used for the CH4 audio level.

2. Adjust the playback level for each channel (CH1 to CH4) separately with the [PLAY] volume control.

• To perform fine adjustment, press the [METER MODE FINE] button. [ The [METER MODE FINE] button is illuminated and the audio

level meter shows a reference fine level of around -20 dBFS or

-18 dBFS.

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

Normal mode level indication Fine mode level indication

• The reference output level shown by the audio level meter is -20 dBFS or

-18 dBFS.

 Adjust with the master and balance controls.

The CH1 and CH2 [PLAY] volume controls, and the CH3 and CH4 [PLAY] volume controls work as one set. The CH1 and CH3 [PLAY] volume controls serve as master volume control and the CH2 and CH4 volume controls as balance control.

• Turn the CH1 or CH3 [PLAY] volume control.

The audio on CH2 or CH4 changes along with CH1 or CH3.

• Turn the CH2 or CH4 [PLAY] volume control to adjust the balance between

CH1 and CH2 or CH3 and CH4.

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

PLAY

Pair Pair

Master volume control

Balance control

Master volume control

Balance control

8-3. AUDIO PLAYBACK LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

●

The audio level meter’s reference level indication changes depending on the setting of menu switch No. 257 <AUD REF. SIGNAL LEV.> (-20 dB or -18 dB).

8-4 MANUAL TRACKING AJUSTMENT

8 PLAYBACK

This unit is equipped with an automatic tracking facility which operates during playback to maintain optimum tracking (with menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING> set to “ON (1)”). With some tapes, noise may still appear — particularly if the tape was recorded on a different VCR. In this case, manual tracking adjustment is also possible.

1. Set menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING> to “OFF (0)”.

2. Set the [CH4/TRACKING] meter for tracking.

Press the right [TRACKING METER MODE] button. [ The [METER MODE TRACKING] button blinks when the meter is switched to

Tracking mode.

3. Adjust until the tracking meter level reaches the maximum.

The Auto Tracking mode can be restored by setting menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING> to “ON (1)”.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[METER MODE TRACKING] button

[TRACKING] adjust knob

[CH4/TRACKING] meter

●

In the Auto Tracking mode, the [METER MODE TRACKING] button lights.

8-5 ERROR CORRECTION

8-6. AUDIO V. FADE FUNCTION

Major changes in waveforms during audio transitions may be heard as noise during playback. To reduce this noise, an Audio V. Fade function is provided. When this is operating, audio transitions are detected and the audio level is faded in a V shape during playback. This function can be set with menu switch No. 214 <PBV. FADE>. OFF (0) :The V. fade function is disabled. 5M (1) : The V. fade function is enabled and audio transitions are faded out and faded in for 5 msec to reduce

noise. For best results, this position is recommended.

10M (2) :The V. fade function is enabled and audio transitions are faded out and faded in for 10 msec to reduce

noise.

Error correction of digital playback signals is performed with the error correction circuit and the error conceal circuit.

Error correction circuit : Errors in playback data caused by dropouts or mis-

tracking are corrected using the results of the data operation.

Error conceal circuit : Major errors that the error correction circuit cannot

correct are concealed with the previous frame data.

Switching the setting of menu switch No. 112 <ECC MODE> turns the error correction circuit ON/OFF. The relationship between the menu setting and error correction operation is shown in the table below.

Menu setting Error correction circuit Error conceal circuit

NORMAL o o

NO CONCEAL o x

NO CORRECTION xx

o:Activated x:Deactivated

• Normally set to “NORMAL (0)”.

• Turning part or all of the error correct circuit OFF allows you to compare noise levels and check the head service life. For comparison, play back a moving picture. For example, when switching between “NORMAL” and “NO CONCEAL” shows a big difference in picture quality, it indicates that the error conceal circuit works and that a major error has occurred. In this case, the heads may no longer be

serviceable and should be replaced.

8 PLAYBACK

8-7 SIMPLIFIED PLAYBACK SPEED ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION

The playback speed can be increased or decreased in two ways (simplified playback speed adjustment function). When two VCRs are being played back, this function helps synchronize playback operation (sync operation).

Increasing/decreasing the playback speed by 7%

1. During playback, press the [FF] or [REW] button while pressing the [PLAY] button.

 While the [FF] button is pressed: The playback

speed is increased by about 7%.

 While the [REW] button is pressed: The

playback speed is decreased by about 7%.

2. Operation differs depending on which button you release first.

 If you release the [PLAY] button first, playback

speed increased/decreased by about 7% is maintained (Latch mode).

• To return to the normal speed, press the [PLAY]

button again.

 If you release the [FF] or [REW] button first, the

normal playback mode is restored.

The tapes loaded on two VCRs can be played back in sync with the same time code data.

Synchronized Running mode

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[IN] button

[OUT] button

[PLAYER] button

[RECORDER] button

Jog dial

[FF] button

[REW] button

[PLAY] button[PREVIEW] button

[ENTRY] button

 Connection

• Connect the [REMOTE IN] connector of the controlled VCR and the [REMOTE OUT] connector of the control VCR with a 9-pin cable.

• Input external sync signals to synchronize the two VCRs.

 Setting

•

Set the Remote/Local switch to “Remote” on the controlled VCR and set the Remote/Local switch to “Local” on the control VCR.

 Operation

1. Set menu switch No. 372 <P+R AT SWAP

MODE> to “ENABLE”.

2. Press the [PLAYER] and [RECORDER] buttons at the same time. Both buttons light up.

3. If the edit mode (assemble, insert) is selected, release it.

4. Search the position from which you want to start playback using the control VCR’s jog dial, etc.

5. Press the [ENTRY] button while pressing the [IN] button to determine the edit IN point for synchronized playback. [ The time code data determined by the control

VCR is registered as the playback start point on the two VCRs.

6. Press the [PREVIEW] button to start the synchronized tape running. The phase is adjusted just before the edit IN point for synchronization.

Notes

● Selecting modes in which

Shuttle Search can be engaged.

With menu switch No. 301 <DIRECT SEARCH> set to “OFF (0)”, Shuttle Search starts only when the [SEARCH] button is pressed. When set to “ON (0)”, Search can start from any mode except REC and REC Pause mode.

● Maximum Search speed

X32, X17 or X6 speed can be selected with menu switch No. 340 <SEARCH SPEED>.

● Use menu switch No. 221

<SEARCH PB AT 1+3/ 2+4> to select whether or not audio is recorded on the cue track when menu switch No. 219 <SEARCH REC CH> is set to CH1+3/ CH2+4.

● Slow Picture mode

With menu switch No. 119 <SLOW PICTURE>

FRAME (0): Slow-motion

frame playback

FIELD (1): Slow-motion

field playback

8 PLAYBACK

8-8 SHUTTLE SEARCH/JOG OPERATION

Rapid visual search can be performed with either of two concentric dials; the outer one serving as a shuttle search dial and the inner one as a jog dial.

● Audio recorded on the tape’s longitudinal cue track or digital audio track is output

during shuttle search and jog operation. (Select the audio during search with menu switch No. 216 <AUD SEL. AT SEARCH>.)

Shuttle search control

1. Turn the outer dial in the Play/Still/Stop/FF/REW modes.

Turn the dial to FWD (clockwise) to search in the forward direction and to REV (counterclockwise) to search in the reverse direction.

[ Search starts. Search speed changes as given below in both forward and

reverse directions depending on how far the dial is turned.

Center (STILL) 0[0.03[0.07[0.10[0.20[0.50[ 1.00 [2[4[ 6[ 10 [ X32

The maximum search speed can be selected with the menu switch No. 340 <SEARCH SPEED>.

● The Still mode is engaged when the dial is set at the center still click position.

Play speed is X1 (normal) at the first click position in both forward and reverse directions. Noiseless playback is available from about -1.0x to +1.0x. In this case, the audio signals on the digital truck of tape are output.

2. To stop search operation

Press PLAY, STOP, FF, or REW depending on which mode is to be engaged next. [ The selected mode is engaged. There is no change in the dial position.

When the [SEARCH] button is pressed, search operation starts at the speed corresponding to the current position of the dial.

Jog operation

1. Turn the inner jog dial.

● Turn the dial in the FWD direction (clockwise) to advance the tape.

Turn the dial in the REV direction (counterclockwise) to reverse the tape. Search speed corresponds to the speed with which the dial is turned.

● The Still mode is engaged whenever you stop turning the dial.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

Search dial

Jog dial

[SEARCH] button

8 PLAYBACK

8-9 VARIABLE SLOW PLAYBACK

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[VAR/P.PLAY] button

Search dial

Variable slow playback can be executed using either of the two methods described below.

Method 1

1. Press the [VAR/P. PLAY] button to engage the Variable mode. The button lights.

2. Turn the search dial.

Variable slow playback from -1 x to +1x is available.

• Turning the search dial all the way in the REV direction gives you -1x speed. Turning it all the way in the FWD direction gives you +1x speed. When the search dial is set to “STILL”, a still picture is displayed.

• The variable slow playback speed is shown on screen.

3. To stop variable slow playback Press the operation button such as the [PLAY], [STOP], [PAUSE/STILL] and [SEARCH] buttons.

Noiseless variable slow playback from -1.0x to +1.0x is available. Triple-pair playback heads assure optimum picture quality.

Cautions

● The V. fade function is enabled only in the Playback, Program Playback or

Variable Slow Playback +1x mode. Under the following conditions, the V. fade function may also be disabled in the Variable Slow Playback +1x mode.

1. In the first15 seconds after the Variable Slow Playback +1x mode is activated.

2. When playing a tape recorded on the BR-D40/DY-70 or some BR-D80/ D85s.

● When playback speed is changed from + to – and vice versa, gray lines may

appear at the top or bottom of the screen (except with normal D9-format video signals). This is normal. It is not a malfunction.

● Noise may appear when the Variable Slow Playback +1x mode is activated.

This is normal. It is not a malfunction.

8 PLAYBACK

8-9 VARIABLE SLOW PLAYBACK

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[PLAY] button

Search dial

Jog dial

Method 2

Variable slow playback can be engaged during normal playback.

1. To use this function, be sure to set the direct search function to OFF.

• Set menu switch No. 301 <DIRECT SEARCH> to “OFF (0)”.

2. Press the [PLAY] button to engage the Play mode.

3. When you want to start variable slow playback, hold the [PLAY] button down

and turn the search dial.

The variable slow playback is executed in the range of +0.90x to +1.10x according to the turning direction and angle of the search dial.

• Turning the search dial all the way in the REV direction gives you +0.90x speed. Turning it all the way in the FWD direction gives you +1.10x speed.

When the search dial is set to “STILL”, the Normal Playback mode (x1.0) is engaged.

• Turning the search dial varies the playback speed in 1% steps. The variable slow playback speed is shown on screen.

4. Release the [PLAY] button to restore the normal playback mode.

Method 3

Turn the jog dial while pressing the [PLAY] button during playback to increase or decrease the playback speed according to the jog dial’s rotation direction and speed.

• Set menu switch No. 301 <DIRECT SEARCH> to “ON”.

 To increase playback speed

● Turn the jog dial clockwise (in the FWD direction) while pressing the [PLAY]

button. The playback speed can be increased up to 2 times normal depending on how fast you rotate the dial.

● When you stop turning the jog dial, normal playback speed is restored.

 To decrease playback speed

● Turn the jog dial counterclockwise (in the REV direction) while pressing the

[PLAY] button. The playback speed can be decreased until the tape stops depending on how fast you rotate the dial.

● When you stop turning the jog dial, normal playback speed is restored.

● When variable-motion

playback is performed at speeds outside the range from -1.0 x to +1.0 x, “!” appears with the operation mode display on-screen. This produces a distorted picture.

● Audio quality differs

depending on the setting of menu switch No. 261 <AUD SEL. AT SEARCH>. When “DIGITAL AUDIO” is selected, audio will be distorted.

8 PLAYBACK

8-10 PROGRAM PLAYBACK

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO

INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[VAR/P.PLAY] button

[PLAY] button

[SHIFT] button

Jog dial

The program playback function lets you vary tape playback speeds between +0.90x and +1.1x. Program playback is possible after setting the initial speed value. During program playback, the playback speed can be varied.

 Engage the Stop or Still mode.

1. Engage the Program Playback mode.

While holding the [SHIFT] button down, press the [VAR/P. PLAY] button.

• The [VAR/P. PLAY] button blinks and the Program Playback mode is engaged.

2. Set the program playback speed. While pressing the [VAR/P. PLAY] button, turn the jog dial.

• Turn the jog dial to set the playback speed in the range of +0.90x to +1.1x.

(0.1% step). Turn the jog dial clockwise to accelerate the playback speed and counterclockwise to decelerate it.

• The program playback speed is shown on the counter.

3. Execute program playback. While holding the [VAR/P. PLAY] button down, press the [PLAY] button.

• Playback continues at the set speed.

During program playback, the [PLAY] and [VAR/P. PLAY] buttons blink.

4. To change the playback speed during program playback, hold the [VAR/P. PLAY] button down and turn the jog dial.

5. To stop program playback, press any operation button, i.e. [STOP], [PLAY], [PAUSE/STILL] and [SEARCH] buttons.

Counter display

PLAY +1.042

TCR 00:00:00:01

8 PLAYBACK

8-11 FF, REW AND COUNTER MEMORY FUNCTIONS

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[SET] button

[FF] button

[REW] button

[PREROLL] button

 To fast-forward or rewind the tape

Press the [FF] or [REW] button.

[ The [FF] or [REW] button lights and the tape is fast-forwarded or rewound.

Maximum FF and REW speeds can be set to 60 times, 32 times or 17 times normal with menu switch No. 319 <FF/REW MAX SPEED>. Factory setting: 60 times normal

 Counter memory function

Setting procedure

● Set the counter mode to “CTL” with the front panel [COUNTER] button.

Counter memory operation

1. Specify a tape section to be recalled.

Press the [RESET] button while pressing the [SET] button at the desired section. [ The counter is reset to “0:00:00:00” and this section is entered in this unit.

* When the counter display mode is set to “TC”, the value at the specified

point is entered.

• Press the [SET] button to check the entered value on the counter display.

2. Start Counter Search.

In the Stop mode, press the [PREROLL] button while pressing the [SET] button. The tape fast-forwards or rewinds and stops automatically at or near counter 0:00:00:00 in CTL mode. In time code mode, the tape stops automatically at or near the entered value.

Notes

Output mode selection in FF and REW modes With menu switch No. 314

<PB/EE MODE> set to “STOP/FF/REW (0)”, press the [PB/EE] button to engage the Still Output mode or EE mode.

Auto REW function setting With menu switch No. 312 <AUTO REW>

The tape is automatically rewound to the start when it comes to an end in the Play or Record mode.

8-12 REPEAT PLAYBACK

With this function activated, tape playback is automatically repeated when the tape

ends.

Setting

● Set menu switch No. 311 <AUTO PLAY> to “ON (1)”

● Set menu switch No. 312 <AUTO REW> to “ON (1)”

 Start playback

When the tape ends, it is rewound to the start and automatically begins playback. This procedure is repeated continuously.

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

2 extra lines for color signals and 4 extra lines for black and white signals are provided for each frame. A data added to the V blanking section of input signals is recorded on the tape as an extra line. In the Play mode, this extra line information is added to the video signal for output.

● Menu switch indication for

extra line NTSC: (525) is displayed

after the menu switch name.

PAL : p is displayed after

the menu switch number and (625) is displayed after the menu switch name.

● For details of menu

switches No. 138 to No. 142, refer to page 47.

9-1 EXTRA LINE DATA RECORDING/PLAYBACK

Extra line recording

Select the line containing the information to be recorded on an extra line.

1. Setting the input signal line for extra-line recording

Select with menu switch No. 138 <EXTRA LINE REC>.

FIX (0)

USER SETTING

(1)

NTSC: Records line 22 information in the input

signal onto extra line-1 and line 284 information onto extra line-2. Factory setting.

PAL : Records line 22 information in input signals

onto extra line-1 and line 623 information onto extra line-2. Factory setting.

Two user-specified lines in the input signal are recorded onto extra line-1 and 2 for color signal data. Four user-specified lines in the input signal are recorded onto the extra line-1 to 4 for blackand-white data. To specify the lines for color signals, set menu switches No. 139 and No. 140. For black-and-white signals, set menu switches No. 139 to No. 142.

2. Selecting an input signal line when USER SETTING (1) is selected in Step 1.

● Set the line to record on extra line-1 with menu switch No. 139 <EXTRA-L R1

SEL> (color or black-and-white signal).

● Set the line to record on extra line-2 with menu switch No. 140 <EXTRA-L R2

SEL> (color or black-and-white signal).

● Set the line to record on extra line-3 with menu switch No. 141 <EXTRA-L R3

SEL> (black-and-white signal only).

● Set the line to record on extra line-4 with menu switch No. 142 <EXTRA-L R4

SEL> (black-and-white signal only).

9-1 EXTRA LINE DATA RECORDING/PLAYBACK

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

Extra line data playback

The menu switches below are used to select whether or not the extra line information should be added to the video signal during playback, and if so, how it should be added.

1. Select how the extra line information is to be added to the playback video signal with menu switch No. 143 <EXTRA LINE PB>.

● Menu switch indication for

extra line NTSC: (525) is displayed

after the menu switch name.

PAL : p is displayed after

the menu switch number and (625) is displayed after the menu switch name.

● For details of menu

switches No. 143 to No. 147, refer to page 47–48.

● When menu switch No. 128

<PB EXTENSION LINE> is set to “ON”, the extra line information in the video signal line is not output.

MUTING (0)

AUTO (1)

USER SETTING

(3)

Extra line information is not added to output video signals. Factory setting.

When video signals are output, extra line information is added to the line selected for extra line recording.

When video signals are output, extra line information is added to the two user-specified lines. Color signal data is output on two lines and blackand-white signal data is output on four lines.

To specify the lines for color signals, set menu switches No. 144 and No. 145. For black-and-white signals, specify the lines with menu switches No. 144 to No. 147.

2. Select a line on which extra line information should be added to the playback video signal when USER SETTING (3) is selected in Step 1.

● Set the line for extra line-1 information with menu switch No. 144 <EXTRA-L

P1 SEL> (color or black-and-white signal).

● Set the line for extra line-2 information with menu switch No. 145 <EXTRA-L

P2 SEL> (color or black-and-white signal).

● Set the line for extra line-3 information with menu switch No. 146 <EXTRA-L

P3 SEL> (black-and-white signal only).

● Set the line for extra line-4 information with menu switch No. 147 <EXTRA-L

P4 SEL> (black-and-white signal only).

Notes on the extra line user setting

● Extra line information is not

output if the selected lines are the same as those set with menu switch No. 400 and No. 401.

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

9-2 EXTRA LINE, VITC LINE, V. BLANK MASK and PB EXTENSION LINE settings

Setting range and priorities for the following menu switches are shown below. No. 138 to 147 EXTRA LINE, No. 601 V. BLANK MASK, No. 400 to 401 VITC LINE SELECT and No. 128 PB EXTENSION LINE.

 NTSC

 PA L

523 524 525 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

[525] LINE No.

SYNC

VITC SETTING RANGE

EXTRA LINE SETTING RANGE

V. BLANK MASK SETTING LINE

EXTENSION SETTING LINE

V. BLANK MASK ON

V. BLANK MASK ON WITH 0.5H

Priority

High

Low

261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290

[525] LINE No.

SYNC

VITC SETTING RANGE

EXTRA LINE SETTING RANGE

V. BLANK MASK SETTING LINE

EXTENSION SETTING LINE

V. BLANK MASK ON

V. BLANK MASK ON WITH 0.5H

Priority

High

Low

Analog output signal is masked.

620 621 622 623 624 625 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

[625] LINE No.

SYNC

VITC SETTING RANGE

EXTRA LINE SETTING RANGE

V. BLANK MASK SETTING LINE

EXTENSION SETTING LINE

V. BLANK MASK ON

V. BLANK MASK ON WITH 0.5H

Priority

High

Low

Analog output signal is masked.

308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337

SYNC

VITC SETTING RANGE

EXTRA LINE SETTING RANGE

V. BLANK MASK SETTING LINE

EXTENSION SETTING LINE

V. BLANK MASK ON

V. BLANK MASK ON WITH 0.5H

Priority

High

Low

[625] LINE No.

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

More than one BR-D95U can be operated at the same time with one RS-422 serial remote controller.

9-pin remote connector

RS-422 serial remote controller

9-pin remote cable

First VCR

REMOTE OUT

Second VCR

REMOTE OUT

Last VCR

REMOTE IN

CH1/2

CH3/4

OUT

IN OUT

R-Y

B-Y

R-Y

OUT

RS-232C

COMPOSITE

LINE IN

COMPONENT

REMOTE IN (9P)

REMOTE OUT (9P)

VIDEO CONTROL

SERIAL V / ASERIAL V / A

AES / EBUAES / EBU

VIDEO

CH1/2

CH3/4

OUT

IN OUT

R-Y

B-Y

R-Y

OUT

RS-232C

COMPOSITE

LINE IN

COMPONENT

REMOTE IN (9P)

REMOTE OUT (9P)

VIDEO CONTROL

SERIAL V / ASERIAL V / A

AES / EBUAES / EBU

VIDEO

CH1/2

CH3/4

OUT

IN OUT

R-Y

B-Y

R-Y

OUT

RS-232C

COMPOSITE

LINE IN

COMPONENT

REMOTE IN (9P)

REMOTE OUT (9P)

VIDEO CONTROL

SERIAL V / ASERIAL V / A

AES / EBUAES / EBU

VIDEO

9-3 SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION

With a remote controller that requires the VCR to reply to commands, set menu switch No. 369 <PARA RUN> to “OFF” for the first VCR, and “ON” for the second and subsequent VCRs. *The recorder's variable

playback speed is -1.0x to +1.0x. The player’s variable playback speed is -2.0x to +3.0x.

Connection

Connect the 9-pin remote connector of the RS-422 serial remote controller to the

first VCR’s [REMOTE IN] connector.

Connect the first VCR’s [REMOTE OUT] connector to the second VCR’s

[REMOTE IN] connector with a 9-pin remote cable, the second VCR’s [REMOTE OUT] connector to the third [REMOTE IN] connector, and so on.

Setting

Set the all connected VCRs as follows.

• Set menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> to “ON (1)”.

• Press the front panel [REMOTE] button to engage the VCR in the Remote mode

(the “REMOTE” indicator lights on the display).

Operation

• Recording, playback, fast-forward and rewind on all the VCRs can be controlled

at the same time with the RS-422 serial remote controller.

Simultaneous operation with the BR-D95U

When the BR-D95U is used instead of the RS-422 serial remote controller, set as follows.  BR-D95U used for simultaneous operation (first VCR)

• If you want to operate the first VCR at the same time, set menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> on the first VCR to “ON (1)”. If not, set to “OFF (0)”

• Set the operation mode to “Local”. Press the [REMOTE] button so that the “REMOTE” indicator on the display goes out.

 Second VCR

• Set menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> to “OFF (0)”.

• Set the operation mode to “Remote”.

 Third and subsequent VCRs

• Set menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> to “ON (1)”.

• Set the operation mode to “Remote”.

Operation

When the [PLAYER] button is pressed...

• If menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> on the first VCR is set to “OFF (0)”; [ The [PLAYER] button is illuminated.

• If menu switch No. 369 <PARA-RUN> on the first VCR is set to “ON (1)”; [ The [PLAYER] and [RECORDER] buttons are illuminated.

Any operation executed on the first VCR will automatically be executed on all the other VCRs as well.

9-4 FIXED TIME CUE UP FUNCTION

The tape can be cued to the position whose time data (fixed time) is recorded with “00F: FIXED TIME ENTRY” on the top menu page (fixed time cue up function). Useful to cue up the tape to a specified position.

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

● Checking the registered

time data

The registered time data

can be checked on screen by displaying “00F: FIXED TIME ENTRY”. Press the [HOLD] button to display the registered time data on the counter display.

● In the Fixed Time Register-

ing mode, press the [RESET] button to reset to “00:00:00:00”.

00E:OPTIMUM REC CURRENT 00F:FIXED TIME ENTRY

00:00:00:00

Registering the fixed time data

1. Press the [MENU] button to display the menu setting screen.

2. Turn the jog dial to select the top menu “00F: FIXED TIME ENTRY”.

• The time data currently registered is shown on screen.

3. Press the [HOLD] button. [ The Fixed Time Data Registering mode is engaged and the time data

currently registered is shown on the counter display.

The uppermost digit blinks.

* The time data does not blink on screen.

Fixed time cue up operation

1. Load a recorded tape.

2. Select the counter display mode with the [COUNTER] button.

• “TC” or “UB”: The tape is cued up according to the time code registered on the tape.

• “CTL”: The tape is cued up according to the time data shown on the CTL counter.

3. Press the [PREROLL] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button. The tape is cued up to the registered position.

4. Turn the jog dial to select the digit. The selected digit blinks.

5. Set the time data by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the value for each digit.

7. When setting is complete, press the [SET] button. “SET” is shown on the counter display. The set time data is registered and the normal screen is restored.

Time data

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[SET] button

[HOLD] button[COUNTER] button

[PREROLL] button Jog dial

[SEARCH] button

[SHIFT] button

● 00A: MENU in the top

Even though INITIAL is

selected for SETTING, registered data is not reset.

9-5 MULTI CUE-UP FUNCTION

In the Multi Cue-Up mode, up to 8 cue points can be specified and cued up. To engage the Multi Cue-Up mode, set menu switch No. 389 <MULTI CUE MODE> to “ON”.

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

1. Engage the Multi Cue-Up mode.

• Set menu switch No. 389 <MULTI CUE MODE> to “ON”. The [ASSEM] button

blinks and the Multi Cue-Up mode is engaged.

2. Set the Counter mode to “TC” with the [COUNTER] button.

3. Play back the tape. Pause the tape at the scene you want to specify as the cue point.

4. Specify the cue point.

• Press the [ENTRY] button while pressing the [VIDEO] button. The first cue

point is specified and the [VIDEO] button lights.

•To specify the second cue point, press the [ENTRY] button while pressing the

[DA1] button.

• Up to 8 cue points can be specified with the button operation shown in the

table below.

● In the Multi Cue-Up

mode, recording and editing operations are disabled.

Cue

Operation buttons Display

point

1 VIDEO + ENTRY The [VIDEO] button lights.

2 DA1 + ENTRY The [DA1] button lights.

3 DA2 + ENTRY The [DA2] button lights.

4 DA3 + ENTRY The [DA3] button lights.

5 DA4 + ENTRY The [DA4] button lights.

6 TC + ENTRY The [TC] button lights.

7 IN + ENTRY The [IN] button lights.

8 OUT + ENTRY The [OUT] button lights.

 To check specified cue points

Press each button for which a cue point is specified. The time of the specified cue point is displayed on the counter display.

(e.g.) To check the third cue point, press the [DA2] button.

[ENTRY] button

[ASSEM] button

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

12 345

9-5 MULTI CUE-UP FUNCTION

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

 To change the specified cue point

Display the image at the cue point you want to change and press the [ENTRY] button while holding down the corresponding cue point button. (e.g.) To change the fourth cue point

• Locate the cue point you want to change and press the [ENTRY] button while holding down the [DA3] button.

 To erase the specified cue point

While holding down the button corresponding to the cue point you want to erase, press the [CANCEL] button. The corresponding button goes out and the cue point is erased. (e.g.) To erase the 6th cue point

• While holding down the [TC] button, press the [CANCEL] button. The [TC] button goes out and the 6th cue point is erased.

5. Perform the Cue-Up operation

Hold down the button corresponding to the required Cue-Up point and press the

[PREROLL] button.

(e.g.) To Cue-Up the third cue point

• Hold down the [DA2] button and press the [PREROLL] button. The third cue point is cued up and the corresponding still picture is displayed.

6. Quit the Multi Cue mode.

Set menu switch No. 389 <MULTI CUE MODE> to “OFF”. The [ASSEM] button goes out and the normal mode is engaged.

● When power is turned off,

all specified cue points are cancelled.

● If the Multi Cue mode is

engaged again before the power is turned off, the last cue point specified before the Multi Cue mode was previously disengaged can still be used.

[CANCEL] button

[PREROLL] button

[ENTRY] button

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

9-6 STRIPING REC Function

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

When preparing a tape for editing, you can use this function to record the video signals, time code and user bits set with the <STRIPING REC MENU> on the entire tape.

Operation

1. If the [RECORDER] or [PLAYER] button is illuminated, press the button so that it goes off.

2. Press the [REMOTE] button to select the “LOCAL” mode for local operation.

3. Press the [REC] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button to open the <STRIPING REC MENU>.

[ The current settings are displayed on screen and the counter display.

● The [REC] button blinks.

● The Stop mode is engaged if the tape is running.

4. Load a cassette tape.

[ When the [REC] switch on the cassette is set to “OFF”, “REC INH” blinks on

screen.

5. Change the settings if required.

● Refer to the menu setting contents and procedures on page 95. The settings

are retained even if the power is turned off.

6. Press the [PLAY] button while holding down the [REC] button to start STRIPING REC.

[ The tape is rewound automatically to the beginning and recording starts.

● During rewind, the [REC] and [REW] buttons blink alternately.

● When recording starts, the blinking “STRIPING” indication lights. The

[PLAY] and [REC] buttons blink simultaneously.

● When the end of the tape is reached, “Complete” is shown on the counter

display, the tape is automatically rewound to the beginning and STRIPING REC ends.

● The following settings which are automatically set with the STRIPING REC

are reset to the original settings when STRIPING REC is complete.

• VIDEO INPUT] button

• [COUNTER] button

• TIME CODE] (INT/EXT, REC/FREE, PRESET/REGEN) switches

• Menu switch No. 111 <VD REC SIGNAL SEL.>

• If menu switch No. 457 <UB AUTO PRESET> is set to “ON”, the registered user bit data is restored.

• Audio muting is released.

7. Press the button on the front panel as required so that the “Complete” indication goes out.

BLACK (MUTING) 00:58:00:00 00 00 00 00

START EXIT

V AUD.SOURCE TCG PRESET UBG PRESET

SOURCE D.I

REC+PLAY STOP

REC INH

CONDITION

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525 625

●

After this operation, all buttons except for [EJECT], [STOP] and [REC] buttons have no effect.

●

When the [STOP] button is pressed in this step, the menu is closed and the STRIPING REC mode is released.

●

Audio signals are not recorded.

●

Editing operations such as assembly and insert cannot be executed. If an operation other than the current mode is executed, for example when the [PLAY] button is pressed during rewind, STRIPING REC ends.

●

When another operation is performed during recording ([REC] + [PLAY]), STRIPING REC ends.

Non-drop frame/drop frame indication (NTSC only)

Set with the menu switch No. 416. Drop frame:

00:00:00

•

Non-drop frame:

00:00:00:00

●

Dropped data cannot be set in the Drop Frame mode. Data has 2 frames which are added (in the Drop Frame mode).

Menu setting details

On screen Counter VID. SOURCE Video BLACK

AUD. SOURCE TCG PRESET 00:58:00:00 UBG PRESET 00 00 00 00

Contents Selects the video signals to be recorded. If noninput signals are selected, the indication blinks. BLACK: Selects the built-in black signal. The built-in

color bar signal cannot be selected.

SIF : Selects the AES/EBU signals. This cannot

be selected if the SA-D95U is not installed. LINE : Selects composite signals. CPN : Selects component signals. Muting is always on. Setting is not possible. Presets the time code. Presets the user bits.

Settings BLACK SIF LINE CPN

(MUTING) Desired value Desired value (0 - F)

Setting

1. Open the <STRIPING REC MENU>. Press the [REC] button while holding down the [SHIFT] button.

2. Turn the jog dial to select the item to be set.

3. Change the setting.

●

VID. SOURCE: Selecting the video signals

While pressing the [SEARCH] button, turn the jog dial to select the signal.

●

TCG PRESET: Setting the time code

1. Press the [HOLD] button.

[ The digit for the time code blinks.

2. Select the digit with the jog dial. [ The selected digit blinks.

3. While pressing the [SEARCH] button, turn the jog dial to change the numeric value.

●

To cancel the setting, press the [HOLD] button. [ The menu item selection menu is restored.

●

To set all digits to 0, press the [RESET] button.

4. Press the [SET] button to register the setting.

●

UBG PRESET: Setting the user bits

1. Press the [HOLD] button.

[ The digit for user bits blinks.

2. Select the digit with the jog dial.

[ The selected digit blinks.

3. While pressing the [SEARCH] button, turn the jog dial to change the numeric value.

●

To cancel the setting, press the [HOLD] button. [The menu item selection menu is restored.

●

To set all digits to 0, press the [RESET] button.

4. Press the [SET] button to register the setting.

4. End menu setting.

It is not necessary to end menu setting to start STRIPING REC right away.

Press the [STOP] button to close the menu and restore normal operation.

9-6 STRIPING REC Function

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

TCR 00:00:00:00

CONDITION

To display selected time data on the counter display and the on-screen display during playback or recording.

 Set the COUNTER switch to TC or UB.

• Set the counter to the Time Code Display mode with the [COUNTER] button.

• Press the [COUNTER] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button to set the counter to the User Bits Display mode. “TC” or “UB” is shown on the display depending on the setting.

TC: Displays time code data. UB: Displays user bits.

10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE

10-1 TIME CODE DISPLAY

Time codes and user bits can be recorded and played back as time data. The time code area on the tape is divided into the main time code sector used for time data for editing and the sub time code sector which can be used for optional recording of time code.

Notes

● On-screen display data are

output through the rear panel [LINE2-SUPER] connector. (When the [ON SCREEN] switch on the sub panel is set to ON.)

● The on-screen display

position can be moved with menu switches No. 501 and 502.

Time code mode display

SUB: Sub time code

Sub time code data display

Sub time code, marked with “SUB”, is displayed with the main time code on the on-screen display.

● Sub time code is shown when:

• Sub time code is output through the VITC output (with menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION SELECT> set to “TIME+SUB TC (3)” or “TIME+SUB TC+MODE (4)”).

SUB TCR 00:00:00:00

TCR 00:00:00:00

●

Time code reader data display during slow play of ±1.0 times normal or slower 1st field or 2nd field is shown. TC1: 1st field TC2: 2nd field

User bits

User bits are provided to allow user-specified data to be included in the time code data. User bits are recorded and played back with the time code. User user bits can be preset, recorded, played back, and displayed.

•

The user bits set for each VCR can be recorded at all times (UB PRESET AUTO).

• However, you cannot set sub time code user bits.

TCR : Time code reader data (see the

left column) TCG : Time code generator data UBR : User bits reader data UBG : User bits generator data TCR • : CTL (control) signal interpo-

lation mark

Hour Second

FrameMinute

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[SHIFT] button

[TC] indicator [UB] indicator

[COUNTER] button

: Non-drop . Drop frame

....

10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE

10-2 TIME CODE INITIAL SETTING (PRESET)

The BR-D95U includes a built-in time code generator so that initial values can be set as desired for the time code and user bits. User bit data is stored in the built-in nonvolatile memory and retained even when the power is turned off. The stored data can be preferentially recorded on the tape for editing (UB auto preset function).

● Drop Frame/Non-Drop

Frame mode (NTSC only) In the NTSC system, the

actual number of frames per second is approximately 29.97. However, the number of frames used by the time code processing standard is 30. To compensate for this difference, the Drop Frame mode drops the 00 frame and the 01 frame once every minute (except the tenth minute). In the NonDrop Frame mode, no frames are dropped and the difference between actual tape time and the time code is ignored.

● In the Drop Frame mode,

the front panel [DF] indicator lights.

Setting

Front sub panel switches for time code setting

● Set the [PRESET/REGEN] switch to “PRESET”.

● Set the [REC/FREE] switch as desired.

REC: Time code preset in the time code generator runs in the Record mode. FREE: Time code runs from the preset point in the time code generator.

● Set the [INT/EXT] switch to “INT”.

● Set the [DF/NDF] switch as desired. (NTSC only):

DROP (0) : Sets the Running mode of the built-in time code generator to

the Drop Frame mode.

NON DROP (1) : Sets the Running mode of the built-in time code generator to

the NON Drop Frame mode.

Front panel setting

● Select the Counter Display mode to TC or UB.

Menu switch setting

● Menu switch No. 457 <UB PRESET AUTO> setting

When user bit data is preset from the 9-pin remote controller, set this to “OFF”. When this is set to “ON”, user bit preset data from the 9-pin remote controller is ignored.

Front sub panel

POWER

OFF

CH1

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO MONITOR

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

SERVICE USE ONLY

TIME CDOE

INTDF

FREE

PRESET

EXTNDF

REC

REGEN

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

OFF

HID GND

OFF

TIME CDOE

INT

FREE

PRESET

EXT

NDF

REC

REGEN

ON SCREENCF

(625)

10-2 TIME CODE INITIAL SETTING (PRESET)

10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE

Procedure

1. Engage the Time Code Generator Preset mode.

Press the [HOLD] button. [ The first digit on the counter display blinks.

2. Set the value for the blinking digit by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.

[ The value of the blinking digit changes. Use the

hexadecimal (0-9, A-F) for user bits.

3. Shift the digit by turning the jog dial.

[ The blinking digits shift to the next one.

4. Set desired values for all digits.

Repeat steps 2 - 3.

5. Presetting is completed by pressing the [SET] button.

[ The selected data are preset in the built-in time

code generator. When preset is finished, the normal on-screen and counter displays are restored.

The user bit data is stored in the built-in memory.

Checking the values set in the time code generator

Procedure

(Do this with the tape unloaded or in the Stop mode)

1. Press the [REC] button to show the value set in the time code generator.

To check the user bit data stored in the built-in memory, set the counter display mode to “UB” and menu switch No. 457 <UB PRESET AUTO> to “ON (1)”.

2. Pressing the [STOP] button restores the normal display mode.

POWER

ON I

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[REC] button [STOP] button

[HOLD] button[SET] button

Jog dial

[SEARCH] button

Notes

● To cancel a setting, press

the [HOLD] button before the [SET] button has been pressed.

● In the preset mode (steps

1 to 4), press the [RESET] button to set all digits to “0”.

● Time code data starts

running as soon as presetting is finished if the front sub panel [FREE/ REC] switch is set to “FREE”.

10-3 TIME CODE RECORDING

There are two different ways of recording time code or user bits; recording the data output from the built-in time code generator and recording externally generated time code or user bits. The user bit auto preset function allows preferential recording of data stored in the built-in nonvolatile memory.

10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE

Recording time code data output from the built-in time code generator

POWER

OFF

CH1

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO MONITOR

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

SERVICE USE ONLY

TIME CDOE

INTDF

FREE

PRESET

EXTNDF

REC

REGEN

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

OFF

HID GND

OFF

TIME CDOE

INT

FREE

PRESET

EXT

NDF

REC

REGEN

ON SCREENCF

(625)

Front sub panel

Menu switch setting

● Menu switch No. 403 <REGEN MODE>: Set as desired in the Regen mode.

● Menu switch No. 450 <SUB TC (VITC) REC>

When set to OFF (0): “00:00:00:00” is always recorded on the sub time code. When set to ON (1): Input VITC is recorded in the sub time code. Factory setting: ON (1)

● Setting of menu switch No. 457 <UB PRESET AUTO>

OFF (0): The user bit auto preset function is disabled. The user bit data from

the built-in time code generator is recorded.

ON (1): The user bit auto preset function is enabled. The user bit data stored

in the built-in memory is recorded.

Procedure

1. Press the [REC] button in the Stop mode and check the value of the builtin time code generator.

[ The data value stays on display when the [REC] button is pressed.

● Press the [STOP] button to restore the normal display mode.

2. Record the time code and user bits.

[ Press the [PLAY] button while pressing the [REC] button.

● TCG or UBG is shown on the on-screen counter display.

3. To stop recording, press the [STOP] button.

Setting

Front sub panel switch setting

Contents of the time code

“REC” or “FREE”

Switch setting

[INT/EXT]

[REC/FREE] [PRESET/REGEN]

“INT”

“PRESET”

Time code preset in the built-in time code generator is recorded.

Recorded in sync with the time code recorded on the tape.

“INT”

“REGEN”

“REC” or “FREE”

Auto regeneration mode during editing

Use menu switch No. 410 <AUTO REGEN MODE> to enable time code regeneration during editing even with the [PRESET/REGEN] switch set to “PRESET”.

● To copy VITC when

SDTI signals are input to the BR-D95U, both the [SERIAL] connectors and [TIME CODE] connectors must be connected.

100

10-3 TIME CODE RECORDING

10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE

Front sub panel

Notes

● Drop/Non-drop Frame

mode selection (NTSC only)

Automatically selected according to the mode of the received time code (Drop Frame or Non-drop Frame).

● Regeneration operation

• When time code is being regenerated with input time code, the built-in time code generator stops counting when no time code is input.

● In the Play mode, time

code regeneration is based on the playback time code value.

● Inserting time code

If only time code data is being inserted, record it on the main time code. It is not possible to insert it in the sub time code.

1. Front sub panel switch setting

● Select the External Time Code Generator mode by setting the [INT/EXT]

switch to “EXT”. The [FREE/REC] and [PRESET/REGEN] switch settings are not necessary.

● Select the Counter Display or On-screen Display mode to TC or UB with the

[COUNTER] and [SHIFT] buttons.

2. Menu switch setting

● Select the external time code to be regenerated.

● Menu switch No. 409 <EXT REGEN TC> (Initial setting: LTC (0))

LTC (0): Regenerates the LTC time code input through the rear panel

[TC IN] connector.

Input LTC time code should be regenerated (matched in terms of sync and phase) with video signals. Make sure you input an external sync signal to the feeding equipment.

VITC (1): Regenerates the VITC time code superimposed on the video

signal input through the rear panel VIDEO IN connector.

● User bit data selection

● Menu switch No. 457 <UB PRESET AUTO> (initial setting OFF (0))

OFF (0): User bits regenerated by the time code generator of this unit is

recorded.

ON (1): The user bit auto preset function is activated and the user bit

data stored in the built-in memory is recorded.

● Select the sub time code.

● Menu switch No. 450 <SUB TC (VITC) REC> (Initial setting: ON(1))

OFF (0): “00:00:00:00” is always recorded on the sub time code. ON (1): Records the input VITC time code in the sub time code.

3. Record the time code.

Press the [PLAY] button while pressing the [REC] button. [ The selected time code will be recorded.

Recording the time code data output from the external time code generator

Externally generated time code can be recorded after being regenerated with the time code data output from the built-in time code generator.

POWER

OFF

CH1

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO MONITOR

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

SERVICE USE ONLY

TIME CDOE

INTDF

FREE

PRESET

EXTNDF

REC

REGEN

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

OFF

HID GND

OFF

TIME CDOE

INT

FREE

PRESET

EXT

NDF

REC

REGEN

ON SCREENCF

(625)

101

10-4 TIME CODE PLAYBACK

10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE

Time code is output through the rear panel [TC OUT] and [VIDEO OUT] connectors during playback. VITC time code with the time code data superimposed on the video signal is output through the [VIDEO OUT-LINE] connector. Sub time code is output through the [VIDEO OUT-LINE] connector as VITC time code when menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUT SELECT> is set to “SUB TC”. Only the main time code is output through the [TC OUT] connector.

Setting

1. Front panel switch setting

● Select a Counter Display mode to TC or UB with the [COUNTER] and [SHIFT]

buttons.

2. Menu switch setting

● For VITC time code output, select a line to be added to the video signal.

● Menu switch No. 400 <VITC LINE-1 SELECT>

(Initial setting: NTSC 16 LINE/PAL 19 LINE)

● Menu switch No. 401 <VITC LINE-2 SELECT>

(Initial setting: NTSC 18 LINE/PAL 21 LINE )

● Select VITC time code output through the [VIDEO OUT] connector.

Menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUT SELECT>

SUB TC (0) : Outputs the VITC time code recorded in the sub time code. TC (1) : Outputs the time code recorded in the main time code. OFF : VITC time code is not output from the [VIDEO OUT]

connector.

Factory setting : TC (1)

● Select the Time Code Output mode during search.

Menu switch No. 452 <SEARCH LTC>

OFF (0) : Outputs time code through the [TC OUT] connector during search

at X1.

ON (1) : Outputs time code through the [TC OUT] connector during search

at all speeds. Continuous time code is not available.

3. Play back the time code.

Press the [PLAY] button.

[ The selected time code is played back. TCR or UBR is shown with the on-screen time code data.

● LTC time code is output from the [TC OUT] connector.

● Main or sub time code selected with menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUT

SELECT> is superimposed on video signals and output to the line selected with menu switch No. 400 and No. 401 from the [VIDEO OUT] connector.

● On-screen display of sub

time code

Sub time code is displayed with the main time code when menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUT SELECT> is set to “SUB TC (0)”.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[PLAY] button

[COUNTER] button

● When you are using this

deck as a player, the recording time code may not be regenerated when you output embedded audio (SERIAL V/A OUT) signals to the BR-D750U, BR-D85U or BR-D80U. In this case, set menu switch No. 237 <EMBEDDED AUDIO> to “OFF”.

102

10-5 SUB TIME CODE RECORDING AND PLAYBACK

10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE

Notes

● When menu switch No. 450

<SUB TC<VITC> REC> is set to “ON (1)” The sub time code is regenerated with the VITC signal superimposed on the video signal from the [VIDEO IN] connector.

● [TC OUT] connector output

No sub time code data is output through the rear panel [TC OUT] connector. Only main time code (LTC) is output from the built-in time code reader.

Time Code Signal Flow

Time code data flow depends on the setting of the menu switch or the [INT/EXT] switch. Use this as a reference for switch setting.

Recording sub time code

● In the sub time code sector, you can record either the same data as in the main

time code or the VITC time code received through the [VIDEO IN] connector.

1. Select data to be recorded on the sub time code.

● Menu switch No. 450 <SUB TC (VITC) REC>

OFF (0): “00:00:00:00” is always recorded on the sub time code. ON (1): Records the VITC received from the [VIDEO IN] connector on the

sub time code.

Initial setting: ON (1)

2. Record the sub time code.

Press the [PLAY] button while pressing the [REC] button. The selected time code will be recorded.

Play back the sub time code.

● Sub time code data is output through the [VIDEO OUT] connector as a VITC time

code signal superimposed on the video signal.

1. Enable sub time code playback.

● Set menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUTSEL> to “SUB TC (0)”.

Factory setting: TC (1)

2. Play back the sub time code.

Press the [PLAY] button.

[ Sub time code data is output through the [VIDEO OUT] connector as a VITC

time code signal superimposed on the video signal.

Sub time code data (indicated with SUB) is shown with the main time code on the on-screen display (with menu switch No. 504 <INFORMATION SELECT> set to “TIME+SUB TC (3)” or “TIME+SUB TC+MODE (4)”).

In addition to the main time code used for editing, this unit can also record (and play back) an optional sub time code in the time code data area on the tape.

TC IN

VIDEO IN (LINE / COMPONENT/ SERIAL V/A)

TC OUT

LINE OUT

Internal time code generator

Main time code domain

Sub time code domain

Menu switch No.450 <SUB TC (VITC) REC>

Menu switch No.451 <VITC OUT SELECT>

INT/EXT switch

INT

EXT

OFF

SUB TC

Recording area

Recording system

Playback system

00:00:00:00

Menu switch No.409 <EXT REGEN TC>

VITC

LTC

103

● Set the switches on the BR-D95U (recording VCR) as follows.

Front panel switch setting

● [INT/EXT] switch: Set to “INT”.

● [REC/FREE] switch: Set to “FREE”.

● [PRESET/REGEN] switch: Set to “PRESET”.

● Set the menu switches as required.

● When menu switch No. 457 <UB PRESET AUTO> is set to “ON (1)”, the user

bit data stored in memory is recorded.

● Send an external sync signal to the [VIDEO REF IN]

connector for editing.

Deliver a black burst or a standard color signal as an external sync signal.

10-6 TIME CODE SWITCH SETTING FOR EDITING

10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE

Note

If there is no external sync signal generator available, send a video input signal to the [VIDEO REF IN] connector on the recording VCR.

POWER

OFF

CH1

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO MONITOR

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

SERVICE USE ONLY

TIME CDOE

INTDF

FREE

PRESET

EXTNDF

REC

REGEN

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

OFF

HID GND

OFF

TIME CDOE

INT

FREE

PRESET

EXT

NDF

REC

REGEN

ON SCREENCF

(625)

Front sub panel

104

11 EDITING

11-1 OUTLINE

Two electronic editing modes are available: insert editing and assemble editing. Signals from a video camera, onair signals and playback signals from another VCR can be used in either type of editing.

CTL signals required

Edit-out point

Edit-in pointPreroll point

Recorder

* Since the full erase head operates during assemble

editing, a non-recorded segment is produced after the postroll point. If assemble editing is applied in the middle of a recorded tape, the picture will be distorted after the postroll point.

Insert editing

Insert editing allows you to insert new audio or video material between existing scenes that have already been recorded. You can choose different video and audio and combine them for insertion. CTL signals must be recorded continuously in the section where the new material is being inserted. Before editing, record CTL signals for a period exceeding the editing time.

Edit-out point

Edit-in pointPreroll point

CTL signals required

Recorder

● To record CTL signals, record a black picture from the built-in signal generator or connect a camera or a

standard TV signal generator and record the output signals.

● Editing is not possible from the very beginning of the tape. The first edit-in point must be registered after the

preroll section.

● Audio signals are not output when color bar signal from the built-in signal generator are inserted for editing

(including preview). Do not select the audio channel for insertion of the color bar signal from the built-in signal generator. It may not be possible to insert the signal properly on the audio channel.

Assemble editing

With assemble editing, scenes are added one after the other in predetermined order. Video, audio, and control signals are recorded simultaneously. To ensure stable editing, CTL signals must be recorded prior to the first edit point for a period exceeding the preroll time (typically, about 30 seconds).

● Preroll time

It takes a few seconds for the tape to stabilize after tape running is started. To ensure that the tape is stable before it reaches the edit point, the tape must start running a few seconds before the edit-in point (prerolling). Select the preroll time from 0 to 15 seconds with the recorder’s menu switch No. 320 <PREROLL TIME>. Use the remote control setting only when executing editing via a remote controller.

● CTL counter values based on the TIMER-1

PRESET command (44.00) from the editing controller can be preset only in the Non-drop Frame mode (NTSC).

● Program Playback speed can be varied between

90% and 110%. The range is always the same even if an external controller or other unit is connected that sets the range outside this limit.

Cautions

● The displayed image may be distorted when the

editing mode is preset from an editing controller during editing or the mode is switched between EE and PB. This is normal. It is not a malfunction. The distortions appear in the editing output image but are not recorded.

● The V. Fade function may not function correctly

when a tape with edited audio is played back. This is normal. It is not a malfunction.

● Noise may be recorded if all insert modes are

canceled during editing with any of editing mode select buttons. This is normal. It is not a malfunction.

● Noise may be heard when editing is on or off in

the Playback mode. This is normal. It is not a malfunction.

105

11-2 COLOR FRAME SERVO SETTING

NTSC : 4-field color frame servo function available PAL : 4 or 8-field color frame servo function available

POWER

OFF

CH1

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO MONITOR

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

SERVICE USE ONLY

OFF

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

OFF

HID GND

OFF

TIME CDOE

INT

FREE

PRESET

EXT

NDF

REC

REGEN

ON SCREENCF

(625)

䡲 Color frame-related menu

switches

• No. 009 <CAP RELOCKING DIR.> Selects the direction of the color frame servo lock.

• No. 387 <CF FLAG REPLY> Selects the field unit for the color frame flag transmitted from the 9-pin remote control connector. (See page 106.)

• No. 421 <TCG CF FLAG> Turns the color frame flag for the time code bit ON/ OFF. (See page 106)

䡲 Color frame editing is still

possible even when material that does not contain color frame information (have no 4-field NTSC color frame information or 8-field PAL color frame information) is inserted in a color framerecorded section. Once the new material has been inserted, color frame editing can be performed by re-editing. In this case, the [CF] indicator on the main unit lights.

11 EDITING

Front sub panel

CONDITION

525

[CF] indicator

Recording

● Color frame information is always recorded regardless of the setting of the front

sub panel’s CF switches and menu switches (except during editing). NTSC: 4-field color frame PAL : 8-field color frame

● During recording, the CF indicator lights on the counter display.

● If you want to synchronize time code with color frame, set menu switch No. 421

<TCG CF FLAG> to “ON” or “AUTO”.

Playback

The color frame servo function can be set with the front sub panel’s CF switches and menu switches.

䡲 Front sub panel switch setting

• Set menu switch No. 008 <CAP LOCK (525)> or No. 008p <CAP LOCK (625)> to “SW SEL”.

• Set the [CF] switch on the front sub panel to “ON”. For PAL, select the 4 or 8-field color frame servo with the [4/8] switch. When the [CF] switch is set to “OFF”, the frame servo is activated.

䡲 Menu switch setting

• For NTSC, set menu switch No. 008 <CAP LOCK (525)> to “4FIELD”.

• For PAL, set menu switch No. 008p <CAP LOCK (625)> to “4FIELD” or “8FIELD”.

Menu switch No. 008 <CAP LOCK>

SW SEL :Select with the front sub panel’s [CF] switches. 2FIELD : Playback is performed with the 2-field servo system. Color framing is

not executed. 4FIELD : Playback is performed with the 4-field color frame servo system. 8FIELD : Playback is performed with the 8-field color frame servo system (PAL

only).

● [CF] indicator

If the front sub panel [CF] switches are set to any position except OFF, the CF indicator lights whenever a tape with color frame information is played back.

Editing precision during color frame editing

When the color frame servo function is used, the edit point may shift to maintain color frame continuity even though menu switch No. 393 <SYNC GRADE> is set to “ACCURATE”.

106

During playback

During EE output

TCG CF FLAG setting CF FLAG being recorded on tape

OFF OFF information OFF information OFF information is recorded

is output is output

ON ON information ON information ON information

is output is output is recorded

OFF information is recorded

AUTO The information The same ON information

recorded on the setting as the is recorded tape is output. one of TCG CF

FLAG being recorded on the tape is output.

OFF information is recorded

11-2 COLOR FRAME SERVO SETTING

11 EDITING

䡵 Color frame reference

VIDEO IN LINE IN monochrome input

LINE IN color signal input COMPONENT IN

REF IN

SDI IN

REC EDIT PB PB REC PB

REF IN is LINE IN LINE IN REF IN REF IN REF IN Gen locking

REF IN is not Internal Color frame Internal reference Gen locking reference information is signal

signal recorded according

to the time code.

The color frame sync condition of the playback shown in the table above changes depending on the setting of menu switch No. 008

<CAP

LOCK>.

䡵 TC color frame flag setting

● The time code color frame flag can be set and recorded only when the front sub panel’s [TIME CODE]

switches are set as follows.

[INT/EXT] switch : INT

[PRESET/REGEN] switch : PRESET When the [TIME CODE] switches are set as above, the time code color frame flag is recorded according to the setting of menu switch No. 421 <TCG CF FLAG MODE>.

Menu switch NO. 421 <TCG CF FLAG MODE>

* The set time code value may shift when menu switch No. 421 <TCG CF FLAG MODE> is set to “ON” or “AUTO” and recording is

performed with TC PRESET.

● When recording time code with the [INT/EXT] switch set to “INT”

and the [PRESET/REGEN] switch set to “PRESET” (except in editing) * Time code is based on the information recorded before the

recording is paused. (i.e. “REC” [ “PAUSE” [ “REC” ) with the REGEN or REC RUN setting.

● To record time code during assemble or time code insert editing

(with tape recorded on BR-D95U). * Set menu switch No. 410 <AUTO REGEN MODE> to a valid

setting (or set to “OFF” if the [PRESET/REGEN] switch is set to “REGEN”) and the [INT/EXT] switch is set to “INT” under the 4field (8-field in PAL) color frame servo.

● When recording time code under any conditions except those

described above.

● When recording time code with the [INT/EXT] switch set to “INT”

and the [PRESET/REGEN] switch set to “PRESET” (except in editing) * Time code is based on the information recorded before the

recording is paused. (i.e. “REC” [ “PAUSE” [ “REC” )with the REGEN or REC RUN setting.

● To record time code during assemble or time code insert editing

(with tape recorded on BR-D95U). * Set menu switch No. 410 <AUTO REGEN MODE> to a valid

setting (or set to “OFF” if the [PRESET/REGEN] switch is set to “REGEN”) and the [INT/EXT] switch is set to “INT” under the 4field (8-field in PAL) color frame servo.

● When recording time code under any conditions except those

described above.

䡵 9P color frame flag

9P color frame flag is set when the setting of menu switch No. 387 <CF FLAG REPLY> matches that of menu switch No. 008 <CAP. LOCK>.

107

11-3 SWAP EDITING

11 EDITING

This unit is provided with a SWAP editing function which enables automatic editing without a controller. When this unit is connected to a player provided with a RS-422 serial remote connector (9-pin), you can operate both units using the recorder’s controls. An on-screen function allows you to check editing data for faster, more efficient editing. During swap editing, all the player can be operated from the recorder.

Editing procedure

STEP-1 STEP-2 STEP-3

STEP-4

STEP-5

STEP-6

STEP-7

Edit mode selection

Preview editing (rehearsal)

Editing (actual)

Preparation Editing

Check

Next edit

Review (check)

Edit point correction

Edit point entry

Preparation

● When only edit start is performed automatically, steps 4, 5 and 7 can be omitted depending on the editing

method (for example, preview editing is not required).

STEP-1 preparation

• No. 328 <EDIT POINT CLEAR>: Set whether or not the edit IN point is canceled when editing is complete.

• No. 367 <EDIT INTERRUPTION>: Set whether or not the editing operation is stopped when an error occurs in the video signal during preroll editing .

• No. 372 <P+R AT SWAP MODE>: Set whether or not pressing the [RECORDER] and [PLAYER] buttons simultaneously is possible.

• No. 373 <MATCH FRAME>:This setting determines whether or not the match frame function is used.

• No. 390 <SWAP VTR SELECT>: Set according to the type of player VCR. Normally set to “AUTO”.

• No. 391 <SYNCHRONIZATION>: Switch the Bump mode ON/OFF during swap editing.

• No. 393 <SYNC GRADE>: Select the editing accuracy during swap editing.

• No. 395 <AUTO EE>: Set whether or not the auto EE function is used during swap editing. Set to “AUTO-EE (1)” when using only one monitor for editing.

• No. 513 <EDIT ON SCREEN>: Selects whether or not the edit display is shown on screen during editing.

Connection

• Make sure all video and audio input/output connectors are properly connected.

• Connect the BR-D95U’s [REMOTE OUT(9P)] connector to the player’s RS-422 serial remote connector with the 9-pin remote cable.

Setting

䡲 Setting the player

• Set the VCR operation mode to the REMOTE mode.

• Adjust the video control parameters.

• Adjust the playback level with the audio playback level adjust knobs (this is not necessary for UNITY).

• Set the edit OUT point registering method with menu switch No. 373.

䡲 Setting the recorder

● Front panel setting

• Set the VCR operation mode to “Local” with the

[REMOTE] button (the [REMOTE] indicator on the display goes out).

• Select the input signal with the video and audio

input signal select buttons.

• Adjust the recording level with the audio recording

level adjust knobs (this is not necessary for UNITY).

• Set the counter mode with the [COUNTER]

button.

● Front sub panel setting Set the time code-related switches for time code

editing. (When editing the time code, be sure to input an external sync signal to the recorder and player.)

• [INT/EXT] switch: Set to “INT”.

• [REC/FREE] switch: Set to “FREE”.

• [PRESET/REGEN]: Set to “PRESET”.

● Menu switch setting

• No. 003 <SYNC SELECT>: Set to “EXT (1)” to

synchronize with an external sync signal.

• No. 320 <PREROLL TIME>: Set the preroll time.

108

● Preparation of the recording (editing master) tape

Assemble editing

CTL signals must be recorded for a period exceeding the preroll time before the first edit IN point. Non-recorded tape

• Record video signals such as a black picture from the built-in signal generator for a period exceeding the preroll time before the first edit IN point.

• When editing time code, record time code in the section before the first edit IN point.

(e.g.) Set the time code of the first edit IN point to “00:00:00:00” and record time code

for 20 seconds in the section before the edit IN point.

• Set the REC Run mode to the time code preset mode and preset the time code to “23:59:40:00”.

• Record time code for 20 seconds or more.

11 EDITING

11-3 SWAP EDITING

Insert editing

CTL signals or time code data must be recorded continuously in the section for insertion.

Beginning of the tape 23:59:40:00

STEP-2 editing mode selection

INSERT

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

DA4

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

[ASSEM] button

[INSERT] button

● Assemble editing

To execute assemble editing, press the [ASSEM] button ON beforehand. Once editing starts, ON/OFF is not possible.

● Insert editing

To execute insert editing, press the [INSERT] button(s) ON for the signal(s) you want to insert (VIDEO, DA1, DA2, DA3, DA4).

Even while insert editing is in progress, each button can be turned ON/OFF as

required. To insert time code, set the [TC] button to ON.

To disengage the editing mode

• Press the illuminated button again to turn off the editing mode. The button’s light will go out.

• When the [ASSEM] button is illuminated, press the [INSERT] button to disengage the Assemble mode. When the [INSERT] button is illuminated, press the [ASSEM] button to disengage the Insert mode.

Edit IN point 00:00:00:00

• After recording is complete, set the [REC/FREE] switch FREE.

• Use the learn function when the connected player is a non-DIGITAL S VCR. To activate the learn function, press the [RECORDER] and [SHIFT] buttons simultaneously. By using the learn function, you can reduce the number of retries in editing.

109

11 EDITING

11-3 SWAP EDITING

STEP-3 edit point entry

Enter the edit IN points for the player and recorder and the edit OUT point for the player or recorder.

1. Press the [PLAYER] or [RECORDER] button to select the VCR to be operated.

2. Search the edit IN point with the search dial or jog dial.

3. Enter the edit IN point by pressing the [ENTRY] button while pressing the [IN] button.

[ The [IN] button is illuminated and the edit IN point is entered.

䡲 Enter the edit IN points for both the player and recorder.

4. Press the [PLAYER] or [RECORDER] button to select the VCR for which the edit OUT point is entered.

5. Search the edit OUT point with the search dial or jog dial and engage the Still mode.

6. Enter the edit OUT point by pressing the [ENTRY] button while pressing the [OUT] button.

[ The [OUT] button is illuminated and the edit OUT point is entered.

䡲 Correcting or canceling the edit point

● Correcting the edit point

• Turn the jog dial while pressing the [IN] and [OUT] buttons to correct the edit point in frames.

● Correct the duration.

• Turn the jog dial while pressing the [IN] and [OUT] buttons simultaneously. Frame correction is possible.

● Canceling the edit point

• To cancel the edit IN or OUT point Press the [CANCEL] button while pressing the [IN] or [OUT] button.

• To cancel both edit IN and OUT points simultaneously Press the [RESET] button.

• To cancel the player and recorder edit points as well as the audio split point: Press the [AUTO EDIT] + [CANCEL]. The selected edit modes (ASSEM, INSERT) and VAR SPEED are not canceled.

䡲 Checking the entered edit point/duration time (length of the edit)

• Checking the entered edit point To view the registered edit point on the counter display, press the [IN] or [OUT] button. * If no edit point has been entered, the display will be

blank (edit point is not shown).

• Checking the duration time Pressing the [IN] and [OUT] buttons simultaneously shows the edit duration on the counter display.

● Whenever you enter a new

edit point, the previously registered edit point is automatically canceled.

● Edit points can be entered

during normal VCR playback.

● If an edit IN point has not

been entered, an edit IN point will be entered automatically at the point where the [AUTO EDIT] button is pressed.

● Variable playback speed

during swap editing The recorder’s variable

playback speed is -1.0x to +1.0x. The player's variable playback speed is

-2.0x to +3.0x.

[OUT] button

[ENTRY] button

[RESET] button

[CANCEL] button

[IN] button

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

● Press the [AUTO EDIT]

button while pressing the [SHIFT] button to execute a “last edit”.

ENTRY

OUT

[OUT]

button

[IN]

button

110

11 EDITING

11-3 SWAP EDITING

STEP-4 preview editing

If correction is not necessary, skip STEP-5 and advance to STEP-6.

● If a major correction is required, enter the edit point again in STEP-3. The previously

entered edit point is automatically canceled.

● If only a minor correction is required,

1. Press the [PLAYER] or [RECORDER] button to select the VCR for correction.

2. Turn the jog dial while pressing the [IN] or [OUT] button to correct the edit IN or OUT point in frames.

STEP-5 correcting the edit point

You can skip STEP-4 and STEP-5 and advance to STEP-6.

1. Press the [PREVIEW] button.

• The [PREVIEW] button is illuminated and both player and recorder start prerolling.

• When the player and recorder complete prerolling, they automatically enter the Play mode and start preview (rehearsal) editing. After the recorder passes the IN point, it enters the Stop mode*. In this case, the recorder’s operation mode is shown as “SEL” (Select EE) in the editing screen display.

䡲 If the edit duration (from the IN point to the OUT point) is long and you only want

to preview the edit IN point, press the [STOP] button to end preview editing.

䡲 Counter display in the Preview mode

A pseudo-advanced time code value is displayed on this unit and in the recorder’s counter in the editing screen display. This gives the user an approximate idea of the running time. The normal on-screen display shows the time code value at the stop position. (only in Assemble Editing)

● When menu switch No. 367

<EDIT INTERRUPTION> is set to “ON (1)” and an error occurs in the video signals during preroll, actual editing will not take place.

* If time code is

discontinuous in preview, the preroll point will not be cued up in actual editing. To avoid this, the recorder enters the Stop mode after it passes the IN point in the Preview mode. (only in Assemble Editing)

[OUT] button

[STOP] button

[PREVIEW] button

[IN] button

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

625

R:SEL

DUR.

P:PLAY

CTL

CTL 0:01:48:00

SPLIT

- :15:01

V•A1•A2•A3•A4•TC

P IN ' OUT R IN ' OUT'

:43:04

0:00:05:00

0:01:48:00 0:02:31:04

0:00:00:00 0:00:43:04

[Editing screen display]

Recorder operation mode

Recorder counter display section

111

11 EDITING

11-3 SWAP EDITING

STEP-7 review (check)

● This step is optional.

1. Press the [PREVIEW] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button.

• The recorder rewinds the tape automatically to the edit IN point and starts

playback.

• After the edit OUT point is passed, the tape runs for about 1 seconds and the

VCR enters the Still mode.

䡲 To cancel the review operation after it has started

Press the [STOP] button.

[SEARCH] button

[PREVIEW] button

[STOP] button

[AUTO EDIT] button

Search dial

[SHIFT] button

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

STEP-6 editing (actual)

AUTO EDIT

1. Press the [AUTO EDIT] button.

The [AUTO EDIT] button lights and both player and recorder start prerolling.

When the player anzd recorder finish prerolling, both enter the Play mode automatically. When the recorder reaches the edit IN point, it automatically switches to the Record mode (actual recording starts).

Editing ends automatically at the edit OUT point.

When an edit has been completed, the recorder continues to run the tape for about 2 seconds (recording for assemble editing and playback for insert editing), then rewinds it automatically one frame before the edit OUT point and enters the Still mode.

䡲 To stop editing before completion, press the [AUTO EDIT] button or press the

[ENTRY] button while pressing the [OUT] button.

● During insert editing, it is

possible to change the channel being inserted.

● Set whether or not the edit

point is automatically cleared after editing is complete with menu switch No. 328 <EDIT POINT CLEAR>

112

[AUTO EDIT] button

[ENTRY] button

[IN]

button

[SHIFT]

button

Jog dial

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525 625

11-4 AUDIO SPLIT EDITING

11 EDITING

This function allows you to specify the audio edit IN point independently of the video edit IN point (in ordinary editing, audio and video signals have the same edit point). This enables independent insertion of audio and video.

• Audio split editing is possible only in the Insert Edit mode.

• It is not possible to set the audio edit IN point separately for each channel (DA1/DA2/DA3/DA4).

Video IN point

Video signal

Recorder

Audio IN point

OUT point

Audio signal

Direction for delay Direction for advance

Insert buttons

Procedure

1. Engage the Insert Edit mode. Press the insert mode buttons ([VIDEO], [DA1], [DA2], [DA3], [DA4] buttons] as

required. * Press the [VIDEO] button and at least one of the audio channels ([DA1], [DA2],

[DA3] or [DA4] ).

2. Enter the edit IN point for both player and recorder. The entered edit IN point is used as the edit IN point for video.

3. Search the recorder’s audio edit IN point with the search or jog dial operation and engage the Still mode.

4. Enter the audio edit IN point by pressing the [ENTRY] button while pressing the [SHIFT] and [IN] buttons.

[ The selected audio insert button blinks, showing that the audio

IN point has been entered.

5. Enter the edit OUT point for the player or recorder. The edit OUT point is set at the same point for audio and video.

6. Press the [AUTO EDIT] button. Editing starts automatically.

䡲 Disengaging the Audio Split mode

• Press the [CANCEL] button while pressing the [SHIFT] and [IN] buttons. [The audio insert button lights, showing that the Audio Split

Edit mode has been disengaged.

• Correcting the audio edit IN point

Turn the jog dial while

pressing the [SHIFT] and [IN] buttons to correct the audio edit IN point in frames.

ENTRY

SHIFT

CANCEL

SHIFT

R:SHTL STIL

DUR.

P:STOP

CTL

CTL 0:01:48:00

SPLIT

- :15:01

V•A1•A2•A3•A4•TC

P IN ' OUT R IN ' OUT'

:43:04

-0:00:51:03

0:01:48:00 0:01:31:04

0:00:00:00 0:00:43:04

113

11 EDITING

Additional editing functions available with the BR-D95U include:

• Last edit function

• Variable-motion editing

• Motion memory function

[SEARCH] button

[AUTO EDIT] button

[PREVIEW] button

Search dial

[SHIFT] button

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

625

䡲 Last edit:

Once editing has been completed, the last edit can be recalled and executed. Press the [AUTO EDIT] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button. Each time this operation is repeated, the last edit and current edit are switched.

䡲 Variable-motion editing

The BR-D95U’s Variable-Motion editing mode allows you to play back tapes on the player at variable speed (-2x to 3x). This is ideal for variable-motion editing and other special effects.

● Operation

: On the recorder (BR-D95U)

1. Press the [RECORDER] button to set the VCR operation mode to “recorder”.

2. Select the recorder’s editing mode (insert or assemble).

3. Register the recorder’s edit points.

4. Press the [PLAYER] button to set the VCR operation mode to “player”.

5. Register the player’s edit IN point.

6. Press the [SEARCH] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button. The player enters the Variable mode. To release the Variable mode, press the [STOP], [FF] , [REW] or [SEARCH] button. To engage the Variable mode again, execute the operation in step 6.

7. Set the playback speed.

• The player plays back the tape at the specified speed (from -2x to 3x).

Speed is set by the direction and angle of the search dial rotation.

• Press the [SET] button to register the variable-motion initial speed value.

Refer to the left column.

• The player’s playback speed is shown on the recorder’s counter display in

percentages (e.g. -200%: -2x, 300%: 3x ). Playback speed can also be determined automatically by setting all four edit points.

8. Press the [AUTO EDIT] button to start editing.

11-5 OTHER FUNCTION

Variable-motion initial speed value setting

Setting procedure

1. In the Variable mode, turn the search dial to select the initial speed value.

[ The initial speed

value is determined by the rotation angle of the search dial and is shown on the screen and counter display.

2. Press the [SET] button to define the initial speed value.

• After this operation, the

initial speed value does not change even if the search dial is turned.

• To change this value,

press the [STOP] button to release the Variable mode, then select the initial speed value again.

• If the [STOP] button is

not pressed, the initial speed value is called when the Variable mode is engaged again after being released.

Notes:

● Use the variable speed value for the player shown on the BR-D95U’s

counter display as a guide. Actual playback speed depends on the player.

● Use a variable speed within the range -1x through 1x. When the BR-D95U

is used as a player, out-of-range variable speed will distort the picture and/ or sound.

114

11 EDITING

䡲 Motion memory function

The motion memory function allows you to manually store the player’s playback

speed data in memory. You can call up this data later for variable-motion editing.

● Operation

: on the recorder (BR-D95U)

1. Register the edit IN points for the recorder and player (do not register the edit OUT point for the player).

2. Press the [PLAYER] button to set the VCR operation mode to “player”.

3. Press the [SEARCH] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button to engage the Variable mode. Press the [SET] button to register the variable-motion initial speed value. Refer to the “Variable-motion initial speed value setting” in the margin on the previous page.

4. Set the playback speed (first speed) to be stored in the motion memory by turning the search dial.

5. Press the [PREVIEW] button to reproduce the motion memory data and turn the search dial to control the playback speed. After the edit IN point, the playback speed set by the angle of the search dial rotation is stored in memory.

• Up to 128 steps can be stored in the motion memory. The number of steps

remaining is shown on the editing screen.

• When the motion memory function is activated, “MM” is shown on the

editing screen. As long as MM data is stored in memory, the [PREVIEW] button will blink.

6. Register the edit OUT point to end the motion memory setting.

• To store the speed in memory again, press the [PREVIEW] button. The

edit OUT point is automatically canceled.

• To check the stored data, press the [PREVIEW] button while pressing the

[SHIFT] button (Motion preview).

7. Press the [AUTO EDIT] button to start editing. If playback speed has not been stored in the motion memory, turning the search dial during editing also controls the playback speed. However, speed data cannot be stored in memory during editing.

11-5 OTHER FUNCTION

Tape speed

(Editing screen)

• When 128 steps are stored in the motion memory, the [PREVIEW] button stops blinking and lights steadily.

• Use the variable speed value for the player shown on the BR-D95U’s counter display as a guide. Actual playback speed depends on the player.

R:SHTL STIL

P R

120 MM

+050

P:VAR

CTL

CTL 0:00:01:00

V•A1•A2•A3•A4

P IN OUT R IN OUT

12:00:00:00

0:00:01:00

12:00:00:00

Motion memory

The number of steps remaining

Duration

11-6 MANUAL EDITING

When editing with a camera or a VCR (player) without an RS-422 serial remote connector, use the BR-D95U’s [AUTO EDIT] and [PREROLL] buttons for editing.

䡲 Use the BR-D95U as the recorder.

1. Select assemble or insert editing with the edit mode select buttons.

• For insert editing, select the signal to be edited.

2. Search the edit IN point with the search and jog dials on the recorder and engage the Still mode.

3. Input the signal from the player or camera.

4. Press the recorder’s [AUTO EDIT] button.

• The recorder prerolls and starts the editing operation.

• Recording starts automatically at the edit IN point.

5. To stop editing, press the recorder’s [AUTO EDIT] button.

• The recorder enters the Still mode. The edit OUT point is automatically

entered as the edit IN point for the next edit.

6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to continue editing.

115

11-7 EDITING WITH THE PRE-READ FUNCTION

The pre-read function makes it easy to add A/B roll editing-style wipes and fades even when using only one player. Pre-read works by reading out the image or sound at the recording start position just before recording starts during editing. Special ef

fects or mixer can then be added to the read-out picture or sound which is then recorded at its original position together with the incoming material. And because both sources (the player and recorder) can handle moving pictures, you’ll be able to achieve smooth, natural and professional looking special editing effects. Pre-read can be used with both video and audio signals.

Feature Comparison of Pre-Read with Conventional A/B Roll Editing.

Pre-read A/B roll editing system

Configuration

Source

material

Picture with

effects

Editing

operation

Wipe and mix effects, etc.

Conventional A/B roll editing system

Player 1

Player 2

Special-effects

device

Recorder

Player

Special-effects

device

Recorder

Source material is on two tapes. One tape is played back by each player.

Source material is obtained from the player's playback picture and the pre-read picture. Material from the recorder can be obtained automatically.

Moving picture and sound (two players)

Moving picture and sound (picture from one player and pre-read picture from the recorder)

Edit point settings required for two players and one recorder.

Edit point settings required for one player and one recorder.

Picture from player 1

Picture from player 2

Pre-read picture

Playback picture

Recorded picture

Playback pictures and sound from players 1/2 are mixed (wiped) for recording.

The playback picture and sound from the player and the pre-read picture from the recorder are mixed (wiped) for recording.

Recorded picture

11 EDITING

䡵 Setting the pre-read function...Set before making the pre-read connection.

● BR-D95U menu switch No. 351 <PREREAD>

Set menu switch No. 351 <PREREAD> to “OFF” when using an editing controller with pre-read capability. Set menu switch No. 351 <PREREAD> to “ON” when using an editing controller with no pre-read capability. This menu switch can be switched ON/OFF independently for video and audio.

● When audio pre-read is performed, it is recommended to use the [AUDIO REC] volume knobs preset position because

audio level for recording cannot be checked.

● Setting the audio output phase for audio pre-read

Use <AUDIO PHASE> in the audio control menu to adjust the audio output phase to correspond with the video output phase (see page 118).

● Correcting audio output phase delay during audio pre-read

To correct audio output timing, set menu switch No. 352 <AUD PREREAD TIMING> to “OFF SET”. Correction is performed by detecting the delay of the external video device based on the delay set with <AUDIO PHASE> in the audio control menu.

Cautions

● Before the pre-read menu switch setting is released, be sure to disconnect the units for pre-read editing.

Otherwise, a loop occurs in the connection cables, causing excessive sound volume and distortion which may damage the connected equipment.

● It is not possible to rewrite sub time code data when the pre-read function is used.

116

Example of editing system configuration

An example of a pre-read editing system is shown below.

11 EDITING

11-7 EDITING WITH THE PRE-READ FUNCTION

● Preview switcher

Automatically switches the signal shown on the main monitor in conjunction with editing controller operation. (e.g. SW-320 from Imeginics Co., Ltd.)

● Enables editing without separate monitors for program output and pre-read output.

● When using an editing controller provided with the pre-read function, is not necessary to set menu switch No.

351 <PRE READ> on the BR-D95U to “OFF”. Usable controller: RM-G820U

● When using the RM-G820U, check that the model name shown on its packing case ends with (A) and that (A)

is indicated on the serial number plate on the controller.

● The RM-G820U is not ready for audio insert editing on CH3 and CH4. To select insertion on CH3 and CH4 with

this unit, change the settings of menu switch No. 377 <AUD EDIT PRESET CH3> and No. 378 <AUD EDIT PRESET CH4>.

Upgrading is required if the RM-G820U without (A) indication is used.

Positions indicating (A)

PLAYER

RECORDER

PLAYER

RECORDER

10KEY IN

DC 9V IN

POWER

OFF

PLAYER

MONITOR OUT MONITOR IN

SYNC

GPI

SW1

RECORDER

(A)

RM-G820U(A)

(A)

Notes:

• Note on the special effects generator As most special effects generators provided with a DVE (Digital Video Effect) function have a built-in frame memory, one frame delay occurs if the pre-read function of the BR-D95U is used. To avoid this, only use special effects generators with no frame memory (such as JVC’s KM-3000) or ones provided with a function that allows you to bypass the frame memory.

• When menu switch No.351 <PRE READ> is set to “VID-ON” or “AUD-ON”, the Record mode cannot be engaged (pressing both the [REC] and [PLAY] buttons has no effect).

• When editing with the pre-read function, the material on the tape in the recorder is replaced with the specialeffects pictures. If you want to keep the original material, be sure to back up the original tape.

• When video phase shifting is obvious in video signals inserted for pre-read editing, adjust the video phase (refer to page 120).

• If the editing controller is not provided with the pre-read function, set menu switch No. 351 <PRE READ> of the recorder BR-D95U to “ON”.

Player

Special-effects

device

Recorder BR-D95U

Special-effects

device

Editing controller

RM-G820U

Preview

switch

Program

output

Main

monitor

Pre-read

output

GPI 3/4

GPI 1/2

9-pin (RS-422)

Monitor Monitor Monitor

VIDEO

AUDIO

AUDIO MONITOR

9-pin (RS-422)

117

12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT

To ensure accurate, error-free editing with an AB roll editing system or any other multiple-unit system, you must adjust the phase of the built-in time base corrector (TBC) after connecting all system components. Phase adjustment must be updated each time you replace a connection cable, add or replace one of the units, or make any other changes.

12-1 CONNECTION

Connection

Send external reference sync signals from the sync signal generator to the system components.

Composite video signals are delivered as video signals.

* When editing on directly connected VCRs without a switcher, adjustment of system and subcarrier phases

is not necessary.

Player 1 Player 2 Recorder

Special-effects device (switcher)

Input player 1 Input player 2

PGM OUT

MONITOR OUT

Monitor Waveform monitor Vectorscope

VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN

BR-D95U

These two cables should be the same length.

75 Ø

Input A

Input B

Input A

Input B

B.B OUT

Genlocking signal (

B.B

)

REF IN REF IN REF IN

Genlocking signal (

B.B

)

118

12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT

12-2 ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the items shown on the counter or on screen display by pressing the front panel [VCON] button.

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

Counter display

[VCON] button

Adjustment items

Adjustment items displayed on screen or on the unit’s display are listed in the table below.

● Video control menu (page 1 on screen)

Display

Adjustment contents

Adjustment

Video signals Operation

On screen Counter LINE CPN SDI Main

TBC

9-pin

display display unit

remote control

VIDEO GAIN Vgain Output video level -128 to +64 䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬

CHROMA Cgain Output chroma level -128 to +64 䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬 GAIN

CHROMA Cphas Output chroma phase -128 to +127 䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬 PHASE

SETUP LEVEL

Setup Output setup level -128 to +127 䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬

VID (H) PHASE

Hphas Output video (horizontal) phase -128 to +127 䡬䡬䡬䡬 X 䡬

VID (V) PHASE

Vphas Output video (vertical) phase -5 to +5 䡬䡬䡬䡬 XX

SYSTEM Sphas Output system phase -64 to +64 䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬 PHASE

SC SCph Output SC phase 0 to 511 䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬䡬

SCH SCHph Output SCH phase 0 to 255 䡬 XX䡬 XX

VIDEO ALL Vunity Standard setting ON/OFF ON/OFF UNITY

VIDEO Vrem External video controller ON/OFF ON/OFF REMOTE

Counter display

Adjustment item

Adjustment value

● Audio control menu (page 2 on screen)

Display Audio signals Operation

On screen Counter Adjustment contents Adjustment ANALOG AES/ SDI Main TBC 9-pin

display value EBU unit remote

control

AUDIO PHASE

Aphas Output audio phase -480 to +720 䡬䡬䡬䡬 XX

value

䡬: Possible X: Impossible

VIDEO CHROMA CHROMA SETUP VID (H) VID (V) SYSTEM SC SCH VIDEO VIDEO

000 000 000 000 000

00 000 000

OFF OFF

GAIN GAIN PHASE LEVEL PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE ALL UNITY REMOTE

<VIDEO CONTROL MENU> 1/2

AUDIO

+000

PHASE

<AUDIO CONTROL MENU> 2/2

On screen (page 1)

On screen (page 2)

* Set the output timing for the analog/

digital audio playback signal. Settings below 00 advance the output timing, while settings above 00 delay the output timing. (1 sample: approx. 20 µs)

119

12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT

12-2 ADJUSTMENT

Adjustment

This section describes the procedure for adjusting video setting value on the operation panel.

1. Press the [VCON] button to display the adjustment items on the counter display.

2. Select the adjustment item by turning the jog dial.

[ Adjustment items are shown on the counter display or on screen.

3. Adjust the value by turning the jog dial while pressing the [SEARCH] button.

• The adjustment items on screen can be selected with the cursor.

• When making an adjustment, refer to an actual signal waveform as shown in the “Adjustment outline for each item” below.

4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other items.

5. Press the [SET] or [VCON] button to finish.

[The normal counter display is restored.

• To reset all video parameters to the default settings, set the adjustment item “VIDEO ALL UNITY” to “ON”.

• To independently set items in the Unity mode, select the desired item and press the [RESET] button. Only the selected item is set to the standard value.

● For individual adjustment, set “VIDEO ALL UNITY” to “off”.

● To make adjustments with the optional TBC remote control unit connected to the rear panel [VIDEO CONTROL]

connector, be sure to set “VIDEO REMOTE” to “ON”.

● YC dealy volume of the TBC remote control(BVR-50) is unavailable.

● You can select the output chroma phase reference signal with menu switch No. 124 <CHROMA ROTE>

(component or composite signals).

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO

MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

R P

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

Counter display

[VCON] button

Jog dial

[SEARCH] button

VIDEO CHROMA CHROMA SETUP VID (H) VID (V) SYSTEM SC SCH VIDEO VIDEO

000 000 000 000 000

00 000 000

OFF OFF

GAIN GAIN PHASE LEVEL PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE PHASE ALL UNITY REMOTE

<VIDEO CONTROL MENU> 1/2

On screen display

120

12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT

Match

(WFM: Inside reference sync signal)

Player 1

Player 2

Video (H) phase (VID (H) PHASE) adjustment

The video phase determines where a picture is located with respect to the sync signal. You can adjust this using the same waveform monitor used for system phase adjustment. Set the WFM reference sync to INT and adjust while observing blanking until no part of the VCR picture is missing in the rising section. If you’re not using a waveform monitor, wipe the picture with the switcher reference signal and adjust until the entire picture can be seen on the monitor.

Adjustment of Player 1

1. Select Player 1 with the special-effects device (switcher).

2. Play back the reference color bar on Player 1.

3. Set the WFM’s input to A and synchronize with input A. Adjust the video phase by setting the [VID (H) PHASE] item of Player 1 so that none of the image is missing. (Refer to the upper figure on the left.)

Adjustment of Player 2

4. Select Player 2 with the special-effects device (switcher).

5. With the WFM’s input set to A and input A synchronized, adjust the video phase by setting the [VID (H) PHASE] item of Player 2 in the same way as step 3. (Refer to the lower figure on the left.)

䡲 Waveforms on the WFM (NTSC signal)

䡲 Waveforms on the VSC (NTSC signal)

A: Video level

Adjust to 100 IRE. (NTSC) Adjust to 0.7 V (PAL)

B: Setup level (NTSC only)

Adjust against deviation.

C: Chroma level/chroma phase

Adjust the two knobs so that the lighting point of each vector waveform is located within the mark.

B: Setup level

A: Video level

Adjustment outline for each item

● Video level/setup level/chroma level/chroma phase Use menu switch No. 124 <CHROMA ROTE> to specify whether the chroma phase reference signal is a composite signal or component signal.

1. Play back a cassette tape with standard color signals recorded on it.

Do not use the built-in color bar signal for adjustment.

2. Adjust the knobs so that the displays on the waveform monitor (WFM) and the vectorscope (VSC)

appear as illustrated below.

NTSC signal waveforms

12-2 ADJUSTMENT

121

12-2 ADJUSTMENT

12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT

Waveforms on the vector scope (NTSC signal)

Fig. 1

Phase setting for genlocking signal

1. Set the vector scope’s input to B and synchronize with input B. Adjust the phase of the burst signal to the reference line with the vector scope (Refer to Fig. 2 on the left.).

Adjustment of Player 1

2. Select Player 1 with the special-effects device (switcher).

3. Play back the reference color bar on Player 1.

4. Set the vector scope’s input to A and synchronize with input B. Adjust the phase of a burst signal to the reference line by setting the [SC PHASE] item of Player 1. (Refer to Fig. 2 on the left.)

Adjustment of Player 2

5. Select Player 2 with the special-effects device (switcher).

6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the subcarrier of Player 2.

Subcarrier phase (SC PHASE) adjustment

System subcarrier phase adjustment matches the VCR subcarrier with the reference subcarrier of the switcher. Adjust so that the reference subcarrier overlaps the VCR subcarrier.

Burst signal

Fig. 2

System phase (SYSTEM PHASE) adjustment

System phase adjustment matches the VCR’s blanking phase with the switcher’s correct blanking phase. Switch between the switcher reference signal and the input VCR signal and adjust until there is no change in phase position. Without this adjustment, video distortion occurs after completion of fading during switching.

Match

50%

Genlocking signal (H sync)

Player’s video output (H sync)

Phase setting for genlocking signal

1. Set the waveform monitor (WFM)’s input to B and synchronize with input B. Set the H sync position with the WFM’s H POSITION volume control to 50% of the H sync level. (Refer to the upper figure on the left.)

Adjustment of Player 1

2. Select Player 1 with the special-effects device (switcher).

3. Play back the reference color bar on Player 1.

4. Set the WFM’s input to A and synchronize with input B. Set the [SYSTEM PHASE] item of Player 1 to the same H sync position as step 1. (Refer to the lower figure on the left.)

Adjustment of Player 2

5. Select Player 2 with the special-effect device (switcher).

6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to adjust the system phase of Player 2.

• The KM-D600 switcher is self-adjusting. No adjustment is required.

(Pay attention to sync fall)

Waveforms on a waveform monitor

The WFM enlarges in 0.1 µsec.

System phase/subcarrier phase/SCH phase

The system phase can be varied with the subcarrier-unit step. The relationship between the sync and burst phase does not change. The phase in the subcarrier can be varied. The relationship between the sync and burst phase does not change.

● To adjust the phase with reference to sync phase, follow the system phase adjustment procedure described below.

● To adjust the phase with reference to subcarrier phase, adjust the system phase as described below, then

adjust the subcarrier phase.

● To vary sync and burst phase (SCH), adjust it with <SCH PHASE> in the video control menu.

* ● Adjustment of the KM-D600 switcher is not

necessary as it is self-adjusting.

● Adjustment of the KM-3000 switcher is not necessary as it is a component switcher.

● Composite switchers other than the KM-D600 must be adjusted.

122

12-3 DUBBING LOOP FUNCTION

12 EDITING SYSTEM PHASE ADJUSTMENT

The dubbing loop function allows you to effectively perform analog video signal adjustment.

The dubbing loop function loops video signals and generates color bar signals from the built-in signal generator. The picture passes through the looped video signal circuit and is fed back and stored in the memory circuit. Then, instead of outputting color bar signals from the signal generator, the picture stored in memory is output and passed through the looped video signal circuit the designated number of times. The same effect is obtained each time this pseudo-dubbing is repeated and the video signal can be adjusted according to the picture output.

VIDEO

LINE

Video signal recording circuit

Color bar signal

Built-in signal generator

VIDEO

LINE1

OUT

Color bar output

Video signal playback circuit

Color bar

Stored in the memory circuit

VIDEO LINE2 OUT

Color bar output

Monitor TV

1. Connect the rear panel's video input connector and video output connector with the cable.

2. Set menu switch No. 620 <DUBBING LOOP> to activate the dubbing loop function. OFF (0) : The dubbing loop function is disabled. 3 TIMES (1) : The dubbing loop function repeats 3 times. 5 TIMES (2) : The dubbing loop function repeats 5 times. 10 TIMES (3) : The dubbing loop function repeats 10 times.

• When the menu switch is set to any position except OFF (0), the Dubbing Loop mode is activated.

3. While referring to the color bar on the monitor, adjust the video control parameters so that color changes in the picture are minimized.

4. To end the dubbing loop mode, set menu switch No. 620 <DUBBING LOOP> to “OFF (0)” and press the [SET] button.Normal operation is restored.

Note

• For the dubbing loop function, use the composite video signal.

123

Complate

Error

Cassette

Out

Not Target

ACK

NAK

12 3

Play

Stop

Enter

ClearError

In Shift(+)

In Shift(-)

Out Shift(+)

Out Shift(-)

Still

In Entry

Out Entry

In Flag

Reset

Out Flag

Reset

In Flag

Recall

Out Flag

Recall

Clear

Go to In

Goto Out

Memory

Rom

Version

89A

Standby

Off

Preroll

Eject

Valiable

Fwd

Valiable

Rev

Rew

Full Ee

Ee off

Rec

Rec Pause

Device Type

Request

Memory Switch Sense Tape Remain

Sense

Status Sense

TC Data

Sense

CTL Data

Sense

Panel Switch

Sense

JVC Status

Sense

CTL Data

Reset In Data Preset

Out Data

Preset

Timer Mode

Select

Analog Data

Select

Panel Switch

Set

Memory

Switch Preset

JVC-1 Table

Select

Basic Table

Select

Rec Request

VTR Ind.

Play after

CueUp with Data

Fwd

Shuttle

Rev

Shuttle

Complate

Error

Cassette

Out

Not Target

ACK

NAK

12 3

Play

FwdShuttle

X0.09

FwdShuttle

Still

FwdShuttle

Stop

Enter

ClearError

CueUp with

Data

In Shift(+)

In Shift(-)

Out Shift(+)

Out Shift(-)

RevShuttle

X0.09

RevShuttle

Still

RevShuttle

X6 Still

In Entry

Out Entry

In Flag

Reset

Out Flag

Reset

In Flag

Recall

Out Flag

Recall

Clear

Go to In

Goto Out

Memory

6789 A

Standby

Off

Preroll

Eject

Valiable

Fwd

Valiable

Rev

Rew

Auto Edit

Preview

Review

Full Ee

Ee off

Select Ee

Ee off

Rec

Rec Pause

Edit On

Edit Off

Preroll

Time Sense

Status Sense

TC Data

Sense

CTL Data

Sense In Data Sense

Out Data

Sense

UB Data

Sense

JVC Status

Sense

SubTC Data

Sense

SubUB Data

Sense

TC Preset

UB Preset

CTL Data

Reset In Data Preset

Out Data

Preset

Edit Preset

Preroll Time

Preset

Timer Mode

Select

Edit Preset

(4ch)

TimeCode

Switch Preset

Memory

Switch Preset

JVC-1 Table

Select

Basic Table

Select

Rec Request

VTR Ind.

CueUp with

Data

Fwd

Shuttle

Rev

Shuttle

JVC-1 TABLE

13 RS-232C protocol

13-1 Command tables

BASIC TABLE

124

䡲 RS-232C specifications

9PIN D-SUB

PIN No. Signal Operation Direction

2 RxD Reception data VCR p CPU

3 TxD Transmission data VCR [ CPU

4 DTR Data terminal ready VCR [ CPU

5 GND Signal ground

6 DSR Data set ready VCR p CPU

Note: CPU means a controller such as a personal

computer.

Mode : Non-synchronized Character length :8 bits Parity check : None Start bit : 1 Stop bit : 1 Data rate : 9600 bps Bit construction

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

Start bit Stop bit

䡲 Basic format

(1) The VCR returns [0A: ACK]·[0B: NAK]·[02:Error]

in response to each byte sent from the controller.

Eg.: E5: EditPreset

CPU: Controller such as a personal computer VCR: BR-D95 series

• In response to the first byte sent from the controller, the VCR returns either [ACK], [NAK] or [Error] within 100 µs.

• The controller confirms the reply from the VCR and then outputs the second byte. The VCR returns either [ACK], [NAK] or [Error] within 100 µs.

• The controller confirms the reply from the VCR and then outputs the third byte. The VCR returns either [ACK], [NAK] or [Error] within 100 µs.

(2) When the data is recognized by the controller, the

VCR returns the standard byte data. Eg.: D7: StatusSense

CPU: Controller such as a personal computer VCR: BR-D95 series

• The VCR starts to output data within 100 µs after receiving the first byte from the controller. Stop bits are inserted between output data.

CPU E5 3* 3* VTR 0A 0A 0A

CPU D7 VTR ** ** ** ** **

䡲 Receiving

• The VCR always receives commands from the controller. The VCR also replies to all “sense” commands such as StatusSense/TimeSense.

• Switch Remote/Local on this unit to “Remote”.

䡲 Time management

Command output timing is managed as follows:

• The minimum command interval is 10 ms.

• The minimum byte interval is 100 µs when the controller outputs the next byte without confirming the [ACK], [NAK] or [Error] returned from the VCR.

䡲 Processing method when an error occurs

(1) When NAK (0B) is returned

The first byte command that the VCR was unable to receive is sent. Output another command.

(2) When Error (02) is returned <The Error section of

StatusSense (bit-0 of the first byte) describes the Error mode.>

• The VCR receives an illegal command for the

second byte and later. With ClearError [41], the previous byte is canceled.

• When ClearError [41] is transmitted repeatedly

because Error [02] is returned more than once, ACK [0A] is returned to release the Error mode. The Error mode can also be released by canceling the commands being input with Clear [56].

(3) If ACK [0A], NAK [0B], Error [02] or Data is not

returned The VCR does not recognize the byte. Cancel the commands being input with Clear [56] and transmit the command again. (The VCR replies within 1 ms after receiving the command from the controller.)

(4) When NotTarget [05] is returned

The target point on the tape specified with CueUpWith Data/Preroll does not exist. Input a different value and try again.

13 RS-232C protocol

13-2 RS-232C Commands

125

䡲 Return command from the VCR 01: Completion Basic/JVC-1 Table

The VCR outputs this command after completing the requested operation (CueUp With Data/Preroll/ AutoEdit, etc.).

02: Error Basic/JVC-1 Table

The VCR outputs this command when invalid data is received.Bit-0 (Error) of the first byte is set for [D7: StatusSense]. In this condition, the VCR will not accept any command except the StatusSense command. The Error mode can be released with [41: ClearError] or [56: Clear]. To cancel the entire command, use [56: Clear]. To cancel only the most recently transmitted data, use [41: ClearError].

03: Cassette Out Basic/JVC-1 Table

The VCR outputs this command when the eject operation is complete.

05: Not Target Basic/JVC-1 Table

The VCR outputs this command when CueUp With Data/Preroll operation cannot be completed normally.

0A: ACK Basic/JVC-1 Table

This command is returned when the defined command is received.

0B: NAK Basic/JVC-1 Table

This command is returned when an undefined or invalid command is received.

ASCII code Basic/JVC-1 Table

Alphanumeric equivalents for certain “Sense” commands.

䡲 Auxiliary commands to the VCR 40: Enter Basic/JVC-1 Table

If this command is transmitted during data transmission, data transmitted after this command will be zero (=30) or space (=20). More information on how to use this command can be found in the descriptions of related commands where its use is valid.

41: Clear Error Basic/JVC-1 Table

In the Error mode, this command cancels the last numeric/data command. The Error mode is engaged when bit-0 (Error) of the first byte in D7: StatusSense is “1”.

56: Clear Basic/JVC-1 Table

In the Error mode, this command releases the command.

The Error mode is engaged when bit-0 (Error) of the first byte in D7: StatusSense is “1”.

ASCII code Basic/JVC-1 Table

Alphanumeric equivalents for certain Preset commands.

TxD 56 RxD 0A

13-2 RS-232C Commands

13 RS-232C protocol

61: a 62: b 63: c 64: d 65: e 66: f 67: g 68: h 69: i 6A: j

6B: k 6C: l 6D: m 6E: n 6F: o 70: p 71: q 72: r 73: s 74: t

75: u 76: v 77: w 78: x 79: y 7A: z 20: Space 2D: -

30: Zero 31: 1 32: 2 33: 3 34: 4 35: 5 36: 6 37: 7 38: 8 39: 9

TxD 3A RxD 0A

TxD 3B RxD 0A

TxD 3C RxD 0A

TxD 3D RxD 0A

TxD 3E RxD 0A

䡲 Corresponding commands 3A: Play key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Playback

3B: Fwd-4 Key Basic Table

4x playback in the forward direction

3C: Fwd-0.09 Key Basic Table

0.09x playback in the forward direction

3D: Fwd Still Key Basic Table

Still playback

3E: Fwd-6 Key Basic Table

6x playback in the forward direction

61: a 62: b 63: c 64: d 65: e 66: f 67: g 68: h 69: i 6A: j

6B: k 6C: l 6D: m 6E: n 6F: o 70: p 71: q 72: r 73: s 74: t

75: u 76: v 77: w 78: x 79: y 7A: z 20: Space 2D: -

30: Zero 31: 1 32: 2 33: 3 34: 4 35: 5 36: 6 37: 7 38: 8 39: 9

126

3F: Stop Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Stop

42: CueUp With Data Basic Table

Execute CueUp to the desired point on the tape. The same as B2: CueUpWithData.

• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after CueUp is complete.

• When the specified point is not on the tape, the VCR returns [05: NotTarget].

• Input values of 0 to 9 which follow the second byte of TxD are expressed with ASCII code.

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. Whatever has not yet been specified is regarded as [30: Zero].

4A: Rev-1 Key Basic Table

1x playback in the reverse direction

4B: Rev-4 Key Basic Table

4x playback in the reverse direction

4C: Rev-0.09 Key Basic Table

0.09x playback in the reverse direction

4D: Rev Still Key Basic Table

Still playback

4E: Rev-6 Key Basic Table

6x playback in the reverse direction

4F: Still Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Still playback

50: In Entry Basic/JVC-1 Table

Registers the current time as IN point.

51: Out Entry Basic/JVC-1 Table

Registers the current time as OUT point.

52: In Flag Reset Basic/JVC-1 Table

Disables the registered IN point.

53: Out Flag Reset Basic/JVC-1 Table

Disables the registered OUT point.

54: In Flag Recall Basic/JVC-1 Table

Enables the disabled IN point.

55: Out Flag Recall Basic/JVC-1 Table

Enables the disabled OUT point.

58: Go-To In Basic/JVC-1 Table

Executes CueUp to the point registered on the tape with [50: In Entry] and [E3: In Data Preset].

• The VCR returns [01: Complete] when CueUp is complete.

• When the specified point is not on the tape, the VCR returns [05: NotTarget].

• When the IN point is not registered, the VCR returns [0B: NAK].

59: Go-To Out Basic/JVC-1 Table

Executes CueUp to the point registered on the tape with [51: Out Entry] and [E4: Out Data Preset].

• The VCR returns [01: Complete] when CueUp is complete.

• When the specified point is not on the tape, the VCR returns [05: NotTarget].

• When the IN point is not registered, the VCR returns [0B: NAK].

5A: Memory Basic/JVC-1 Table

Registers the current time as the Memory point.

5B: Memory Search Basic/JVC-1 Table

Executes CueUp to the point registered on the tape with [5A: Memory].

• The VCR returns [01: Complete] when CueUp is complete.

• When the specified point is not on the tape, the VCR returns [05: NotTarget].

• When the Memory point is not registered, the VCR returns [0B: NAK].

TxD 3F RxD 0A

10H 1H 10M 1M TxD 42 3* 3* 3* 3* RxD 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A

10S 1S 10F 1F 3* 3* 3* 3*

0A 0A 0A 0A 01

TxD 50 RxD 0A

TxD 4A RxD 0A

TxD 4B RxD 0A

TxD 4C RxD 0A

TxD 4D RxD 0A

TxD 4E RxD 0A

TxD 4F RxD 0A

TxD 51 RxD 0A

TxD 52 RxD 0A

TxD 55 RxD 0A

TxD 53 RxD 0A

TxD 54 RxD 0A

TxD 58 RxD 0A 01

TxD 59 RxD 0A 01

TxD 5A RxD 0A

TxD 5B RXD 0A 01

13-2 RS-232C Commands

13 RS-232C protocol

127

72: ROM version JVC-1 Table

Returns the CPU (ROM)’s program version.

• The first byte is fixed at 21.

• The second byte shows the type of software (D9 = “03”).

• The third byte shows version information.

A0: Standby On Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Standby On

A1: Standby Off Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Standby Off

A2: Preroll Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Rewinds the tape for the preroll time.

• The preroll time is specified by [E6: Preroll Time Preset].

• When it is not specified, the VCR’s menu setting is used.

• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after preroll is complete.

A3: Eject Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Eject

• When the Eject operation is completed properly, the VCR returns [03: Cassette Out].

A5: Variable Fwd Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Variable playback in the forward direction. Specify the speed with the second byte of TxD. Refer to the speed/data correspondence table. (See page 134.)

Auxiliary commands

• Clearing with [56: Clear] and [41: ClearError] has no effect.

• [40: Enter] has no effect.

A6: Variable Rev Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Variable playback in the reverse direction. Specify the speed with the second byte of TxD. Refer to the speed/data correspondence table.

Auxiliary commands

• Clearing with [56: Clear] and [41: ClearError] has no effect.

• [40: Enter] has no effect.

TxD 72 RxD 21 03 **

AB:FF Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Fast-forwarding.

AC: Rew Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Rewinding.

B2: CueUp With Data Basic/JVC-1 Table

Executes CueUp to the desired point on the tape. Same as 42: CueUpWithData. (Basic only)

• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after CueUp is complete.

• When the specified point is not on the tape, the VCR returns [05: NotTarget].

• Input values of 0 to 9 which follow the second byte of TxD are expressed with ASCII code.

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second byte or later of TxD. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. Whatever has not yet been specified is regarded as [30: Zero].

B2: Play after CueUp With Data JVC-1 Table

Executes CueUp and engages the Play mode. The VCR returns [01: Complete] after CueUp is complete. When the specified point is not on the tape, the VCR returns [05: NotTarget].

• Input values of 0 to 9 which follow the second byte of TxD are expressed with ASCII code.

Auxiliary commands

•[56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. Whatever has not yet been specified is regarded as [30: Zero].

10H 1H 10M 1M TxD B2 3* 3* 3* 3* RxD 0A 0A 0 A 0A 0A

10S 1S 10F 1F 3* 3* 3* 3*

0A 0A 0A 0A 01

10H 1H 10M 1M TxD B2 3* 3* 3* 3* RxD 0A 0A 0 A 0A 0A

10S 1S 10F 1F 3* 3* 3* 3*

0A 0A 0A 0A 01

TxD AB RxD 0A

TxD AC RxD 0A

13-2 RS-232C Commands

13 RS-232C protocol

TxD A0 RxD 0A

TxD A1 RxD 0A

TxD A2 RxD 0A 01

TxD A5 ** RxD 0A 0A

TxD A3 RxD 0A 03

TxD A6 ** RxD 0A 0A

128

B5: Fwd Shuttle Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Shuttle search playback in the forward direction.

• Specify the Fwd Shuttle Mode. The speed is specified by the second byte.

• Specify the adjustment speed.

• The second TxD byte consists of numeric data and is expressed with “30”, “31”, “32” ... “38”, “39”, “3A”, “3B” and “3C”.

• When invalid data is received, the VCR returns “02: Error”.

• The speeds corresponding to each value are shown below.

Data 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

Speed Still 0.03 0.09 0.20 0.50 1 2 4 6

39 3A

10 17 or 32

Data 3B 3C

Adjustment speed -10% +10%

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared. [40: Enter] has no effect.

B6: Rev Shuttle Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Shuttle search playback in the reverse direction. Specify the Fwd Shuttle Mode. The speed is specified by the second byte. Specify the adjustment speed.

• The second TxD byte consists of numeric data and is expressed with “30”, “31”, “32” ... “38”, “39”, “3A”, “3B” and “3C”.

• When invalid data is received, the VCR returns “02: Error”.

• The speeds corresponding to each value are shown below.

Data 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38

Speed Still 0.03 0.09 0.20 0.50 1 2 4 6

39 3A

10 17 or 32

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] has no effect.

TxD B5 3* RxD 0A 0A

C0: Auto Edit Key Basic Table

Executes Auto Edit on the VCR.

• The editing channel must be selected with [E5/ E9: Edit Preset].

• Use with [FA: Rec Request].

•

Set the preroll time with [E6: Preroll Time Preset].

• When preroll time is not specified, the VCR’s menu setting is used.

• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after Auto Edit is complete. [0B: NAK] is returned to the player.

C1: Preview Key Basic Table

Execute Preview on the VCR.

• The editing channel must be selected with [E5/ E9: Edit Preset].

• Use with [FA: Rec Request].

•

Set the preroll time with [E6: Preroll Time Preset].

• When preroll time is not specified, the VCR’s menu setting is used.

• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after Preview is complete. [0B: NAK] is returned to the player.

C2: Review Key Basic Table

Execute Review on the VCR.

• [C0: Auto Edit] must be complete.

• Set the preroll time with [E6: Preroll Time Preset].

• When preroll time is not specified, the VCR’s menu setting is used.

• The VCR returns [01: Complete] after Review is complete. [0B: NAK] is returned to the player.

C4: Full EE On Basic/JVC-1 Table

Checks VCR’s input signals.

The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.

C5: EE Off Basic/JVC-1 Table

Releases EE check.

C8: Select EE On Basic Table

Checks the input signals to the editing channel selected by [E5/E9: Edit Preset].

The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.

C9: EE Off Basic Table

Releases EE check.

TxD B6 3* RxD 0A 0A

13-2 RS-232C Commands

13 RS-232C protocol

TxD C4 RxD 0A

TxD C5 RxD 0A

TxD C8 RxD 0A

TxD C2 RxD 0A 01

TxD C9 RxD 0A

TxD FA C0 RxD 0A 0A 01

TxD FA C1 RxD 0A 0A 01

129

13-2 RS-232C Commands

13 RS-232C protocol

CA: Rec Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Recording Use with [FA: Rec Request].

The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.

CB: Rec Pause Key Basic/JVC-1 Table

Recording is paused. Use with [FA: Rec Request].

The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.

CE: Edit On Key Basic Table

The channel selected with [E5: Edit Preset] is engaged in the Edit mode. Use with [FA: Rec Request].

The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.

CF: Edit Off Key Basic Table

Stops the editing operation. The VCR enters the Play mode after editing is complete.

The VCR returns [0B: NAK] to the player.

D1: Device Type Request JVC-1 Table

Returns the model name of the connected VCR.

• Uses ASCII code to express “0” to “9”, “a” to “z”, and “space”.

• For example, d = “64”, 9 = “39”, 5 = “35” and space = “20” for the BR-D95.

D3: Memory SwitchSense JVC-1 Table

Recalls menu switch content.

• Refer to “Menu Switch setting” to find out more about menu switch contents.

• Specify the address data you want to recall with the second TxD byte.

The corresponding addresses are as follows.

01 :Servo/System-1 information 08 :System-2 information 10 :System-3 information 20 :System-4 information 40 :System-5 information 88 :System-6 information 89 :System-7 information 90 :System-8 information 87 :System-9 information 09 :System-10 information 91 :System-11 information 92 :System-12 information 94 :System-14 information 0a :Video information-2 0b :Video information-3 0c :Video information-4 0d :Video-5 information 1b :Video-6 information 0e :Video-7 information 1e :Video-8 information 1c :Video-9 information 0f : Video-10 information 1f :Video-11 information 1d :Video-12 information 05 :Audio-2 information 06 :Audio-3 information 07 :Audio-4 information 03 :Audio-5 information 30 :Audio-6 information

TxD FA CA RxD 0A 0A

TxD FA CB RxD 0A 0A

TxD FA CE RxD 0A 0A

TxD CF RxD 0A

TxD D1 RxD ** ** ** **

TxD D3 ** RxD 0A ** **

31: Audio-7 information 80: TimeCode-1 information 81:TimeCode-2 information 79: TimeCode-3 information 77: TimeCode-4 information 78 :TimeCode-5 information 82: OnScreen-1 information 83: OnScreen-2 information 84: TBC information-1 86: TBC information-3

• The third and fourth RxD bytes express individual bit information (Data1/Data2) for the specified address.

• When invalid data is received, the VCR returns “02: Error”.

Auxiliary commands

• When [02: Error] occurs, [56: Clear] is valid. All commands back to the first TxD byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is invalid.

D4: Tape Remain Sense JVC-1 Table

Recalls remaining tape time information.

D6: Preroll Time Sense Basic Table

Shows the preroll time setting. The VCR returns the value set by [E6: Preroll Tim e Preset] or the value set with the VCR’s menu.

D7: Status Sense Basic/JVC-1 Table

Shows the VCR status.

• For an explanation of the meaning of each bit, refer to “Sense command details”.

D8: Current TC Sense Basic/JVC-1 Table

Shows the current TC time data.

•Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to 9 are expressed in ASCII code.

D9: Current CTL Sense Basic/JVC-1 Table

Shows the current CTL time data.

•Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to 9 are expressed in ASCII code.

• The most significant bit at 10H expresses “minus”.

TxD D7 RxD ** ** ** ** **

TxD D8 RxD 3* 3* 3* 3*

10H 1H 10M 1M

TxD D4 RxD 3* 3* 3*

1H 10M 1M

TxD D6 RxD 3* 3*

10S 1S

TxD D9 RxD 3* 3* 3* 3*

10H 1H 10M 1M

3* 3* 3* 3* 10S 1S 10F 1F

130

13-2 RS-232C Commands

13 RS-232C protocol

TxD DB RxD 3* 3* 3* 3*

10H 1H 10M 1M

3* 3* 3* 3* 10S 1S 10F 1F

TxD DA RxD 3* 3* 3* 3*

10H 1H 10M 1M

3* 3* 3* 3* 10S 1S 10F 1F

TxD DE RxD 3* 3* 3* 3*

10H 1H 10M 1M

3* 3* 3* 3* 10S 1S 10F 1F

TxD DD RxD ** ** ** **

TxD DC RxD ** ** ** **

10H 1H 10M 1M

DA: In Data Sense Basic Table

Shows the set IN point.

•Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to 9 are expressed in ASCII code.

DB: Out Data Sense Basic Table

Shows the set OUT point.

•Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to 9 are expressed in ASCII code.

DB: Panel Switch Sence JVC-1 Table

Shows the various settings on the front panel.

• For an explanation of the meaning of each bit, refer to “EC:Panel Switch Preset”.

DC: Current TC UB Sense Basic Table

Shows the current TC UB data.

•Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to f (HEX) are expressed in ASCII code.

DD: JVC Status Sense Basic/JVC-1 Table

Shows the VCR status.

• For an explanation of the meaning of each bit, refer to “Sense command details”.

DE: Current Sub Tc Sense Basic Table

Shows the current SUB-TC time data.

•Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to 9 are expressed in ASCII code.

DF: Current Sub UB Sense Basic Table

Shows the current SUB TC UB data.

•Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to f (HEX) are expressed in ASCII code.

TxD DF RxD ** ** ** **

10H 1H 10M 1M

** ** ** ** 10S 1S 10F 1F

10H 1H 10M 1M TxD E0 3* 3* 3* 3* RxD 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A

10S 1S 10F 1F 3* 3* 3* 3*

0A 0A 0A 0A

TxD E2 40 RxD 0A 0A

** ** ** ** 10S 1S 10F 1F

TxD DB RxD ** ** ** **

DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3

E0: TC Data Preset Basic Table

Presets the TC data.

•Values after the second TxD byte from 0 to 9 are expressed in ASCII code.

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. Whatever has not yet been specified is regarded as [30: Zero].

E1: TC UB Data Preset Basic Table

Presets the TC UB data.

•Values after the first RxD byte from 0 to f (HEX) are expressed in ASCII code.

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. Whatever has not yet been specified is regarded as [30: Zero].

E2: Counter Reset Basic JVC-1 Table

Resets the CTL counter.

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is required for the second TxD byte.

10H 1H 10M 1M TxD E1 ** ** ** ** RxD 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A

10S 1S 10F 1F ** ** ** **

0A 0A 0A 0A

131

TxD E6 3* 3* RxD 0A 0A 0A

TxD E7 3* RxD 0A 0A

TxD E8 ** ** ** RxD 0A 0A 0A 0A

10S 1S 10F F 3* 3* 3* 3*

0A 0A 0A 0A

10H 1H 10M 1M TxD E3 3* 3* 3* 3* RxD 0A 0A 0A 0A A

10H 1H 10M 1M TxD E4 3* 3* 3* 3* RxD 0A 0A 0A 0A A

10S 1S 10F F 3* 3* 3* 3*

0A 0A 0A 0A

TxD E5 3* 3* RxD 0A 0A 0A

13-2 RS-232C Commands

13 RS-232C protocol

E3: In Data Preset Basic/JVC-1 Table

Presets the IN point.

•Values after the second TxD byte from 0 to 9 are expressed in ASCII code.

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. Whatever has not yet been specified is regarded as [30: Zero].

E4: Out Data Preset Basic/JVC-1 Table

Presets the OUT point.

•Values after the second TxD byte from 0 to 9 are expressed in ASCII code.

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. Whatever has not yet been specified is regarded as [30: Zero].

E5: Edit Preset Basic Table

Selects the edit mode.

• Each bit is defined as follows:

76543 2 1 0

First byte 0 0 1 1 0 INS ASM Video

Second byte 0 0 1 1 0 TC Aud2 Aud1

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is invalid.

E6: Preroll TimePreset Basic Table

Sets the preroll time. The set value should be less than 59 seconds. If the preroll time is not set with this command, use the VCR’s menu switch setting.

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is invalid.

E7: Timer Mode Select Basic/JVC-1 Table

Switches the current timer.

• Each bit is defined as follows:

76543 2 1 0

First byte 0 0 1 1 0 UB CTL TC

• CTL = 32, LTC = 31, LTC UB = 35

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is invalid.

E8: Analog Data Set JVC-1 Table

Sets values for specified audio and video settings.

• Selects the setting item and sets the data as shown below with the input values for the second TxD byte or later. The second byte: Selects the setting item (DATA0) The third/fourth byte: Sets the data (DATA1, DATA2)

A/V Setting items DATA0 DATA1 DATA2

Tracking volume 20 00-FF —

Output video level 70 00-C0 —

Output chroma level 71 00-C0 — Output video H phase 72 00-FF —

Output setup level 73 00-FF —

Output chroma phase 74 00-FF —

Output video V phase 75 03-0D — Output system phase 76 03-0D —

Output SC phase 77

Low-order High-order

0000-011F

Output SCH phase 78 00-FF —

Output audio phase 79

Low-order High-order

20FE-D002

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid when [02: Error] occurs. All commands back to the first TxD byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is invalid.

132

13-2 RS-232C Commands

13 RS-232C protocol

TxD E9 3* 3* 3* RxD 0A 0A 0A 0A

TxD EB 3* RxD 0A 0A

Fifth byte (DATA3)

76 5 43210

IS IS IS IS MON CF CF PB CH2 1 CH2 0 CH1 1 CH1 0 /IPT SW FLD /EE

VIDEO INPUT SELECT

Setting

Bit name

VID GEN DIG VID LINE

CPN 0 0 0

LINE 0 0 1

SIF 0 1 —

Internal 1 — —

AUDIO INPUT SELECT

Setting

Bit name

IS**1 IS**2

ANA 0 0

AES/EBU 0 1

SDI 1 —

Internal 1 1

AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

Setting

Bit name

MS**L MS**R

OFF 0 0

R CH 0 1

L CH 1 0

L+R CH 1 1

COUNTER

Setting

Bit name

UB TC

CTL 0 0

TC — 1

UB 1 0

PB PB/EE

Setting

Bit name

PB/EE

PB/EE 0

PB 1

REMOTE

Setting

Bit name

Rem/9pin

REMOTE 1

LOCAL 0

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] and [41: ClearError] are invalid.

• [40: Enter] is invalid.

E9: Edit Preset 2 Basic Table

Selects the Edit mode for 4 channels.

• Each bit is defined as follows:

76543 2 1 0 First byte 0 0 1 1 0 INS ASM Video Second byte 0 0 1 1 0 TC Aud2 Aud1 Third byte 0 0 1 1 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is invalid.

EB: TC Switch Preset Basic Table

Switches the time code generator function.

• Each bit is defined as follows:

765432 1 0

The first byte 0 0 1 1 0 REC RUN REGEN EXT

• REC RUN : 1: Rec Run 0: Free Run REGEN : 1: Regene 0: Preset EXT : 1: Ext 0: Int

Auxiliary commands

• [56: Clear] is valid for the second TxD byte or later. All commands back to the first byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is invalid.

EC: Panel Switch Preset JVC-1 Table

Switches various settings on the front panel.

• Settings are defined with the input values for the second TxD byte or later. The bit assignment is shown below.

Second byte (DATA0)

76 54 3210

MS MS MS MS VID DIG LINE CH4 L CH4 R CH3 L CH3 R GEN VID

Third byte (DATA1)

76 543210

MS MS MS MS UB TC CH2 L CH2 R CH1 L CH1 R

Fourth byte (DATA2)

76543210

IS IS IS IS Rem CH4 1 CH4 0 CH3 1 CH3 0 /9pin

TxD EC ** ** ** ** RxD 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A

Setting

Bit name

MON/IPT

MONITOR 0

INPUT 1

AUDIO INPUT/AUDIO MONITOR

Setting

Bit name

CF SW

CF OFF 0

CF ON 1

CF ON/OFF SW

Setting

Bit name

CF FLD

4 FIELD 0

8 FIELD 1

8 FIELD: (625) only

CF 4/8 SW

133

ED: Memory Switch Preset Basic/JVC-1 Table

Rewrites the contents of the menu switch.

• Refer to “Menu Switch Setting” to find out more about menu switch contents.

• The setting of the menu switch changed with this command is reset to the default setting when the VCR is turned OFF.

• The second byte expresses the address (Data0).

The corresponding addresses are as follows.

01 : Servo/System-1 information 08 :System-2 information 10 :System-3 information 20 :System-4 information 40 :System-5 information 88 :System-6 information 89 :System-7 information 90 :System-8 information 87 :System-9 information 09 :System-10 information 91 :System-11 information 92: System-12 information 94 :System-14 information 0a :Video information-2 0b :Video information-3 0c : Video information-4 0d :Video-5 information 1b :Video-6 information 0e :Video-7 information 1e :Video-8 information 1c :Video-9 information 0f : Video-10 information 1f :Video-11 information 1d :Video-12 information 05 :Audio-2 information 06 :Audio-3 information 07 : Audio-4 information 03 :Audio-5 information 30 : Audio-6 information 31 :Audio-7 information 80 :TimeCode-1 information 81 :TimeCode-2 information 79 : TimeCode-3 information 77 :TimeCode-4 information 78 :TimeCode-5 information 82 :OnScreen-1 information 83 : OnScreen-2 information 84 :TBC information-1 86 :TBC information-3

• The third and fourth bytes express individual bit information for the specified address. These are expressed as Data1/Data2 information.

• The rewritten data can be checked with D3: MemorySwitchSense. The D3 command applies only to JVC Table-1.

Auxiliary commands

• When [02: Error] occurs, [56: Clear] is valid. All commands back to the first TxD byte are cleared.

• When [02: Error] occurs, [41: ClearError] is valid. The previous command (one byte) is cleared.

• [40: Enter] is invalid.

TxD ED ** ** ** RxD 0A 0A 0A 0A

13-2 RS-232C Commands

13 RS-232C protocol

TxD FB RxD 0A

TxD FA RxD 0A

TxD F7 RxD 0A

TxD F6 RxD 0A

F6: JVC Table-1 On Basic/JVC-1 Table

Use the JVC Table-1 commands.

F7: Basic Table On Basic/JVC-1 Table

Use the Basic Table commands. JVC Table-1 is set to OFF.

FA: Rec/DubRequest Basic/JVC-1 Table

Send this command before sending commands such as [CA: REC], [CB: RECPause].

• The recording standby mode is maintained until the REC or STOP command or Error release command is transmitted.

FB: VTR IND Basic/JVC-1 Table

Checks that a VCR is connected.

134

13-3 Speed/data correspondence table

Data Speed Data Speed Data Speed 00-1D STILL 80 1.00 B8 7.50 1E-2C 0.03 81 1.04 B9 7.80 2D-3A 0.07 82 1.07 BA 8.00 3B-44 0.10 83 1.11 BB 8.40 45-4B 0.13 84 1.15 BC 8.70 4C-50 0.17 85 1.20 BD 9.00 51-56 0.20 86 1.24 BE 9.30 57-59 0.23 87 1.30 BF 9.70 5A-5C 0.27 88 1.33 C0-C1 10.00 5B-60 0.30 89 1.38 C2 10.70 61 0.33 8A 1.43 C3-C4 11.10 62 0.34 8B 1.49 C5 11.50 63 035 8C 1.54 C6 12.40 64 0.37 8D 1.60 C7-C8 13.00 65 0.38 8E 1.65 C9-CA 14.00 66-68 0.40 8F 1.72 CB-CC 15.00 69 0.44 90 1.78 CD 16.00 6A 0.45 91 1.84 CE-CF 17.00 6B 0.47 92-94 2.00 D0-D1 18.00 6C-6E 0.50 95 2.13 D2 19.00 6F 0.54 96 2.21 D3 20.00 70 0.56 97 2.29 D4-D5 21.00 71 0.58 98 2.37 D6 22.00 72 0.60 99 2.46 D7 23.00 73 0.63 9A 2.55 D8 24.00 74 0.65 9B 2.64 D9 25.00 75 0.67 9C 2.74 DA-DB 26.00 76 0.70 9D 2.84 DC 27.00 77 0.72 9E-A0 3.00 DD 28.00 78 0.75 A1 3.30 DE 29.00 79 0.78 A2 3.40 DF 31.00 7A 0.80 A3 3.50 E0 32.00 7B 0.84 A4 3.70 E1 33.00 7C 0.87 A5 3.80 E2 34.00 7D 0.90 A6-A8 4.00 E3 35.00 7E 0.93 A9 4.40 E4 37.00 7F 0.97 AA 4.50 E5 38.00

AB 4.70 E6 39.00 AC-AE 5.00 E7 41.00 AF 5.40 E8 42.00 B0 5.60 E9 44.00 B1 5.80 EA 45.00 B2 6.00 EB 47.00 B3 6.30 EC 49.00 B4 6.50 ED 50.00 B5 6.70 EE 52.00 B6 7.00 EF 54.00 B7 7.20 F0 56.00

F1-FF 58.00

13 RS-232C protocol

135

13-4 Contents of the sense commands

The bit assignment for each status data byte returned with D7: Status Sense is as follows: Status (No. 1): First byte

Bit Status Remarks Bit-7 Undefined Always “1” Bit-6 Undefined Always “0” Bit-5 Short FF/REW Short FF: Detects the beginning

of the tape and fast-forwards the tape until Stand-By On is engaged. Short REW: Detects tape end and rewinds the tape until Stand-By On is engaged.

Bit-4 REC Inhibit Indicates that a cassette with

no safety tab has been loaded or that recording prohibition has been selected with the

VCR’s memory switch. Bit-3 Cassette Out No tape is loaded in the VCR. Bit-2 Servo Lock During tape playback, both the

capstan and drum servo are

locked. Bit-1 Undefined Always “0” Bit-0 Error Shows that an invalid command

has been received. In this status,

a continuously transmitted

command will not be accepted.

To release the Error mode,

cancel the commands one byte

at a time with 41: Error Clear. Or

cancel all commands with 56:

Clear.

Status (No. 2) Second byte

Bit Status Remarks Bit-7 EE Externally input video signals

are output. Bit-6 A1 EE Mode Externally input audio (A1)

signals are output. Bit-5 Video Mute Video signals are muted

(returned from the DS micro-

processor). Bit-4 Audio Mute Audio signals are muted

(returned from the AUDIO

microprocessor.). Bit-3 Warning Shows that the VCR is in the

Auto-Off mode.

SPD 0.03

SPD 0.1

SPD 0.2

SPD 0.5

SPD 1.0

SPD 2.0

SPD 4.0

SPD 6.0

SPD 10

SPD 17

SPD 32

SPD

0.03

0.1

0.2

0.5

1.0

2.0

4.0

6.0

Speed Code-3 0 00000001 111 Speed Code-2 0 00011110 000 Speed Code-1 0 01100110 011 Speed Code-0 0 10101010 101

Bit-2 DEW Condensation. Bit-1 Tape Begin The tape winding start sensor

is detected.

Bit-0 Tape End The tape winding end sensor

is detected.

Status (No. 3) Third byte

Bit Status Remarks Bit-7 Unused Always “0” Bit-8 Unused Always “0” Bit-6 Unused Always “0” Bit-5 Unused Always “0” Bit-4 Unused Always “0” Bit-3 Unused Always “0” Bit-2 Unused Always “0” Bit-1 Search mode During CueUp/Preroll (only

when controlled from the RS232C)

Bit-0 Unused Always “0”

Status (No. 4) Forth byte

Bit Status Remarks Bit-7 Play Mode Playback Bit-6 FF Mode Fast-forward Bit-5 REW mode Rewind Bit-4 Stop mode Stop Bit-3 Stand-by mode Standby-Off Bit-2 Eject Tape is ejected Bit-1 REC mode Record Bit-0 Unused Always “0”

Status (No. 5) Fifth byte

Bit Status Remarks Bit-7 Pause mode Pause Bit-6 Unused Always “0” Bit-5 Shuttle Fwd During Shuttle/Jog/Variable

search in the forward direction

Bit-4 Shuttle Rev During Shuttle/Jog/Variable

search in the reverse direction Bit-3 Speed Code-3 Refer to the table below. Bit-2 Speed Code-2 Refer to the table below. Bit-1 Speed Code-1 Refer to the table below. Bit-0 Speed Code-0 Refer to the table below.

13 RS-232C protocol

136

13-4 Contents of the sense commands

13 RS-232C protocol

JVC Status (No. 4) Forth byte

Bit Status Remarks

Bit-7 TBC board The TBC board is installed.

Always “1”

Bit-6 TC board The TC board is installed.

Always “1”

Bit-5 DA3 Ins Lamp Audio-3 Insert editing mode

is selected.

Bit-4 DA4 Ins Lamp Audio-4 Insert editing mode

is selected.

Bit-3 Auto mode Auto Edit/Preview/Review

being executed.

Bit-2 Unused Always “0”

Bit-1 Unused Always “0”

Bit-0 Unused Always “0”

The bit assignment for status data each byte returned with DD: JVC Status Sense is as follows: JVC Status (No. 1) First byte

Bit Status Remarks

Bit-7 Undefined Always “1”

Bit-6 Undefined Always “0”

Bit-5 Unused Always “0”

Bit-4 Unused Always “0”

Bit-3 Unused Always “0”

Bit-2 Unused Always “0”

Bit-1 JVC Table 1 JVC Table-1 is selected.

Bit-0 Local “Local” is selected.

JVC Status (No. 2) Second byte

Bit Status Remarks

Bit-7 Generator The TC generator is selected

for the current timer mode.

Bit-6 UB UB is selected for the current

timer mode.

Bit-5 TC TC is selected for the current

timer mode.

Bit-4 CTL CTL is selected for the

current timer mode.

Bit-3 CTL CTL

Interpolation Interpolation

Bit-2 DF DF is selected for the current

timer mode.

Bit-1 LTC LTC is selected for the

current timer mode.

Bit-0 Unused Always “0”

JVC Status (No. 3) Third byte

Bit Status Remarks

Bit-7 REC Run TC setting is 1: REC Run 0:

Free Run.

Bit-6 Regen TC setting is 1: Regen 0:

Preset.

Bit-5 Ext TC setting is 1: Ext 0: Int

Bit-4 TC Ins Lamp TC Insert editing mode is

selected.

Bit-3 DA1 Ins Lamp Audio-1 Insert editing mode

is selected.

Bit-2 DA2 Ins Lamp Audio-2 Insert editing mode

is selected.

Bit-1 V Ins Lamp Video Insert editing mode is

selected.

Bit-0 Assem Lamp Assemble editing mode is

selected.

137

13-5 Menu switch setting information

13 RS-232C protocol

The set value expresses the corresponding bit value. 2 bits or more are expressed as follows:

00 11 210 311 4 100 5 101

SERVO information/SYSTEM information-1 DATA0 01

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

002 OPERATION LOCK OFF 0

ON 1

003 SYNC SELECT EXT 1

AUTO 3

005 AUTO TRACKING OFF 0

ON 1

SYSTEM information-2 DATA0 08

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

D95 525/625 525 0

625 1

300 DIRECT EJECT OFF 0

ON 1

301 DIRECT SEARCH OFF 0

ON 1

302 BACK SPACE OFF 0

ON 1

312 AUTO REW AT OFF 0

TAPE END ON 1

SYSTEM information-3 DATA0 10

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value 307 PAUSE/STILL/STP 1 SEC 0

TIME 10 SEC 1

30 SEC 2 1 MIN 3 2 MIN 4 3 MIN 5 4 MIN 6 5 MIN 7

311 AUTO PLAY AT OFF 0

TAPE BEGIN ON 1

314 PB/EE MODE STOP/FF/REW 0

STOP 1

328 EDIT POINT CLEAR DISABLE 0

ENABLE 1

SYSTEM information-4 DATA0 20

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value 317 9PIN DEVICE ID JVC D80 0

JVC D860/D92/D95

1 DVW-A500 2 USE SETTING (382–385)

320 PREROLL TIME 0SEC 0

15SEC 15

323 PREROLL END STANDBY-ON 0

MODE

STILL 1

SYSTEM information-5 DATA0 40

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value 390 SWAP VTR SELECT AUTO 0

TYPE-9 9

391 SYNCRONIZATION DISABLE 0

ENABLE 1

393 SYNC GRADE ACCURATE 0

+/-1FRAME 1 +/-2FRAME 2 ROUGH 3

395 AUTO-EE RECORDER

ONLY

AUTO-EE 1

76543210

D1 307 307 307 D2 328 311 314

76543210

D1 005 002 D2 003 003

76543210

D1 312 302 301 300 D2 D95

76543210

D1 317 317 D2 323 320 320 320 320

76543210

D1 391 395 D2 390 390 390 390 393 393

138

13-5 Menu switch setting information

13 RS-232C protocol

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

340 SEARCH SPEED X32 0

X17 1

X6 3

367 EDIT OFF 0

INTERRUPTION ON 1

368 STARTING PIC OFF 0

FREEZE ON 1

369 PARA-RUN OFF 0

ON 1

371 INPUT SELECT OFF 0

SAFETY ON 1

372 P+R AT SWAP MODE ENABLE 0

DISABLE 1

373 MATCH FRAME OFF 0

ON 1

374 MENU OPEN SAFETY OFF 0

ON 1

381 JOG FEELING NORMAL 0

INSENSITIVE

386 MUTING AT NO TAPE DISABLE 0

ENABLE 1

SYSTEM information-11 DATA0 91

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

375 AUDIO EDIT

PRESET NO DEFINITION 0

CH1 CH1 1

CH2 2

CH1 OR CH2 3

376 AUDIO EDIT

PRESET NO DEFINITION 0

CH2 CH1 1

CH2 2

CH1 OR CH2 3

377 AUDIO EDIT

PRESET NO DEFINITION 0

CH3 CH1 1

CH2 2

CH1 OR CH2 3

378 AUDIO EDIT

PRESET NO DEFINITION 0

CH4 CH1 1

CH2 2

CH1 OR CH2 3

76543210

D1 D2 363 363 363

76543210

D1 378 378 377 377 376 376 375 375 D2

SYSTEM information-6 DATA0 88

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

319 FF/REW MAX SPEED X60 0

X32 1

X17 2

351 PREREAD

VID OFF/AUD OFF

VID ON/AUD OFF

VID OFF/AUD ON

VID ON/AUD ON

SYSTEM information-7 DATA0 89

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

357 DIAG AT POWER ON OFF 0

ON 1

359 JOG FEELING TYPE-1 0

(REMOTE) TYPE-2 1

TYPE-3 2 TYPE-4 3 TYPE-5 4

SYSTEM information-8 DATA0 90

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

363 CONTROLLER DEFAULT 0

SELECT RM-450 1

CMX AEGIS 2

NOT DEFINED

SYSTEM information-10 DATA0 09

76543210

D1 319 319 351 D2 351 351

76543210

D1 D2 359 359 359 357

D1 374 373 372 371 369 368 367 D2 386 381 340 340

76543210

(525)

139

SYSTEM information-12 DATA0 94

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

008 CAP LOCK (525) SWSEL 0

2FLD 1

4FLD 2

008p

CAP LOCK (625) SWSEL 0

2FLD 1

4FLD 2

8FLD 3

009

CAP RE-LOCKING DIR.

ACCELERATION 0

DECELERATION 1

352 AUD PREREAD NORMAL 0

OFFSET 1

387 CF FLAG REPLY 4FLD 1

2FLD OR 4FLD 2

OFF 3

387p

CF FLAG REPLY 8FLD 0 (625) 4FLD OR 8FLD 1

2FLD OR 4FLD 2 OR 8FLD

OFF 3

SYSTEM information-14 DATA0 92

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

382 9 PIN ID (1ST) 0 0

F15

383 9 PIN ID (2ND) 0 0

F15

384 9 PIN ID (3RD) 00

F15

385 9 PIN ID (4TH) 0 0

F15

13-5 Menu switch setting information

13 RS-232C protocol

D1 387 009

008p 008p

008 008

D2 387

387p 387p

352

76543210

TIMING

(525)

76543210

D1 120 111 11 9 11 2 11 2 111 D2 104 104 111

VIDEO information-2 DATA0 0A

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

104

CPN LEVEL/SETUP

LOW/ON 0

HIGH/ON 1

LOW/OFF 2

HIGH/OFF 3

111

VD REC SIGNAL SEL.

COLOR BAR 1

BLACK 2

MULTI BURST 4

PULSE& BAR 5

112 ECC MODE NORMAL 0

NO CONCEAL 1

NO CORRECTION 2

119 SLOW PICTURE FRAME 0

FIELD 1

120 NO CTL MUTING OFF 0

ON 1

VIDEO information-3 DATA0 0B

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

138 EXTRA LINE REC FIX 0

USER (COLOR) 1

USER (MONO) 2

139 EXTRA-L R1 SEL 10 00

(525) 11 01

22 12

273 18

284 29

140 EXTRA-L R2 SEL 10 00

(525) 11 01

22 12

273 18

284 29

(525)

76543210

D1 139 139 139 139 138 138 D2 140 140 140 140 140 140 139 139

76543210

D1 383 383 383 383 382 382 382 382 D2 385 385 385 385 384 384 384 384

(525)

140

VIDEO information-4 DATA0 0C

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

143 EXTRA LINE PB MUTING 0

AUTO 1

USER SETTING 3

144 EXTRA- L P1SEL 10 0

22 12

273 18

284 29

145 EXTRA- L P2SEL 10 0

22 12

273 18

284 29

VIDEO information-5 DATA0 0D

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

124 CHROMA ROTE CPS 0

CPN 1

128

PB EXTENSION LINE

OFF 0

ON 1

130

H BLANKING WIDTH

WIDE 0

NARROW 1

133 LINE SETUP (525) OFF 0

ON 1

148 IN VBLANK OFF 0

YCOMB (525) ON 1

OFF WITH21 2

149

VIDEO OUT SELECT

NORMAL 0

SYNC DELAY 1

AROLL 2

76543210

D1 144 144 144 144 143 143 D2 145 145 145 145 145 145 144 144

(525)

76543210

D1 130 128 D2 149 149 148 148 124 133

VIDEO information-6 DATA0 1B

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

138p

EXTRA LINE REC FIX 0

(625) USER (COLOR) 1

USER (MONO) 2

139p

EXTRA- LR1 SEL 600 (625) : :

22 16

319 18

:: 335 34 623 35

140p

EXTRA- LR2 SEL 600 (625) : :

22 16

319 18

:: 335 34 623 35

VIDEO information-7 DATA0 0E

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

141 EXTRA-L R3 SEL 11 0 1

(525) : :

22 12

273 18

:: 284 29

142 EXTRA-L R4 SEL 11 0 1

(525) : :

22 12

273 18

:: 284 29

76543210

D1 139p 139p 139p 139p 138p 138p D2 140p 140p 140p 140p 140p 140p 139p 139p

76543210

D1 141 141 141 141 141 141 D2 142 142 142 142 142 142

13-5 Menu switch setting information

13 RS-232C protocol

141

VIDEO information-8 DATA0 1E

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

141p

EXTRA-L R3 SEL 600 (625) : :

22 16

319 18

:: 335 34 623 35

142p

EXTRA-L R4 SEL 600 (625) : :

22 16

319 18

:: 335 34 623 35

VIDEO information-9 DATA0 1C

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

143p

EXTRA LINE PB MUTING 0

AUTO 1

USER SETTING 3

144p

EXTRA-L P1 SEL 600

(625) : :

22 16

319 18

:: 335 34 623 35

145p

EXTRA-L P2 SEL 600 (625) : :

22 16

319 18

:: 335 34 623 35

76543210

D1 141p 141p 141p 141p 141p 141p D2 142p 142p 142p 142p 142p 142p

76543210

D1 144p 144p 144p 144p 143p 143p D2 145p 145p 145p 145p 145p 145p 144p 144p

VIDEO information-10 DATA0 0F

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

146 EXTRA-L P3 SEL 00 00

(525) : :

12 12

273 18

284 29

147 EXTRA-L P4 SEL 00 00

(525) : :

12 12

273 18

284 29

VIDEO information-11 DATA0 1F

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

146p

EXTRA-L P3 SEL 600 (625) : :

22 16

319 18

:: 335 34 623 35

147p

EXTRA-L P4 SEL 600 (625) : :

22 16

319 18

:: 335 34 623 35

76543210

D1 146 146 146 146 146 146 D2 147 147 147 147 147 147

76543210

D1 146p 146p 146p 146p 146p 146p D2 147p 147p 147p 147p 147p 147p

13-5 Menu switch setting information

13 RS-232C protocol

(625)

142

VIDEO information-12 DATA0 1D

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

148p

IN VBLANK OFF 0

YCOMB (625) ON 1

AUDIO information-2 DATA0 05

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

214 PB V.FADE OFF 0

5M 1

10M 2

215 AUD REC VOLUME CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 0

MODE1 MAS-1 BAL-2 1

/MAS-3 BAL-4

216 AUD PB VOLUME CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4 0

MODE1 MAS-1 BAL-2 1

/MAS-3 BAL-4

219 SEARCH REC CH CH1/CH2 0

CH3/CH4 1

CH1+3/CH2+4 2

221 SEARCH PB AT MUTING OFF 0

1+3/2+4 MUTING ON 1

AUDIO information-3 DATA0 06

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

222 MONITOR MIX AVERAGE 0

MODE RMS 1

ADDITION 2

223 CH3/4 OUT SEL MUTING 0

AT 2CH CH1/2 1

232 AUDIO MON LEVEL -6DB 0

LCH 0DB 1

4DB 2

233 AUDIO MON LEVEL -6DB 0

RCH 0DB 1

4DB 2

76543210

D1 214 214 D2 221 219 219 215 216

76543210

D1 D2 148p

236 PRO 48K S.R.CONV. AUTO 0

ON 1

237 EMBEDDED AUDIO OFF 0

ON 1

261

AUD SEL AT SEARCH

LINEAR TRACK

DIGITAL TRACK

AUDIO information-4 DATA0 07

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

224 AUDIO IN LEVEL -6DB 0

CH1 0DB 1

4DB 2

-20DB 3

225 AUDIO IN LEVEL -6DB 0

CH2 0DB 1

4DB 2

-20DB 3

226 AUDIO IN LEVEL -6DB 0

CH3 0DB 1

4DB 2

-20DB 3

227 AUDIO IN LEVEL -6DB 0

CH4 0DB 1

4DB 2

-20DB 3

228 AUDIO OUT LEVEL -6DB 0

CH1 0DB 1

4DB 2

229 AUDIO OUT LEVEL -6DB 0

CH2 0DB 1

4DB 2

230 AUDIO OUT LEVEL -6DB 0

CH3 0DB 1

4DB 2

231 AUDIO OUT LEVEL -6DB 0

CH4 0DB 1

4DB 2

76543210

D1 233 233 232 232 261 223 222 222 D2 237 236

76543210

D1 227 227 226 226 225 225 224 224 D2 231 231 230 230 229 229 228 228

13-5 Menu switch setting information

13 RS-232C protocol

143

76543210

D1 451 457 452 451 450 D2

403 REGEN MODE TC&UB 0

TC 1

UB 2

410 AUTO REGEN MODE ASM&INS 0

ASM 1

INS 2

OFF 3

TIME CODE information-2 DATA0 81

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

409 EXT REGEN LTC 0

VITC 1

TIME CODE information-3 DATA0 79

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

450 SUB TC (VITC) REC OFF 0

ON 1

451 VITC OUT SELECT SUB TC 0

TC 1

OFF 2

452 SEARCH LTC OFF 0

ON 1

457 UB PRESET AUTO OFF 0

ON 1

76543210

D1 409 D2

13-5 Menu switch setting information

13 RS-232C protocol

AUDIO information-5 DATA0 03

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

247 DIG AUD AT NORMAL 0

ASYNC IN NOISE REDUCE 1

248 AUD DIG I/F OFF 0

MUTING ON 1

251

CH3/4 SOURCE SEL.

CH3

SW/CH4

CH3

CH1/CH4

CH3

SW/CH4

CH2

CH3

CH1/CH4

CH2

AUDIO information-6 DATA0 30

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

253 CH1 REC SIGNAL SILENCE 0

SEL. 1 kHz SINE 1

254 CH2 REC SIGNAL SILENCE 0

SEL. 1 kHz SINE 1

255 CH3 REC SIGNAL SILENCE 0

SEL. 1 kHz SINE 1

256 CH4 REC SIGNAL SILENCE 0

SEL. 1 kHz SINE 1

257

AUDIO REF. SIGNAL

-20 dB 0

LEV.

-18 dB 1

TIME CODE information-1 DATA0 80

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

400 VITC LINE-1 SELECT 10 0

(525) : :

20 10

401 VITC LINE-2 SELECT 10 0

(525) : :

20 10

402 CTL DF SELECT TCG SETTING 0

(525) NON DROP 1

DROP 2

76543210

D1 D2 251 251 248 247

76543210

D1 257 256 255 254 253 D2

76543210

D1 401 401 401 401 400 400 400 400 D2 410 410 403 403 402 402

144

ON SCREEN information-2 DATA0 83

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

504 INFORMATION TIME 0

SELECT TIME + MODE 1

TIME + SUBTC

+ MODE

512 MUTING/ALARM OFF 0

MESSAGE ON 1

513 EDIT ON SCREEN OFF 0

ON 1

TBC information-1 DATA0 84

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

620 DUBBING LOOP OFF 0

3TIMES 1

5TIMES 2

10TIMES 3

TBC information-3 DATA0 86

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

601 V BLANK MASK OFF 0

ON 1

ON WITH 0.5H 2

TIME CODE information-4 DATA0 77

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

400p

VITC LINE-1 SEL 70 (625) : :

22 15

401p

VITC LINE-2 SEL 7 0 (625) : :

22 15

TIME CODE information-5 DATA0 78

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

421 TCG CF FLAG OFF 0

ON 1

AUTO 2

ON SCREEN information-1 DATA0 82

Corresponding menu switches

No. Menu switch name Setting Set value

501 CHARA H POSITION 00

502 CHARA V POSITION 00

11 11

505 REMAIN ENABLE DISABLE 0

ENABLE 1

76543210

D1 504 504 513 512 504 D2

13-5 Menu switch setting information

13 RS-232C protocol

76543210

D1 401p 401p 401p 401p 400p 400p 400p 400p D2

76543210

D1 421 421 D2

76543210

D1 502 502 502 502 501 501 501 501 D2 505

76543210

D1 D2 620 620

76543210

D1 D2 601 601

145

WARNING 01 1

LAMP FAILURE

Main code

Sub code

CONDITION

AUTO

OFF

Warning On-screen display Warning code information Behavior and actions to be taken

code

0A FAN FAILURE The power turns OFF after

about 9 minutes.

01 1 LAMP FAILURE Tape sensor LED broken. (AUTO OFF)

02 1 CONDENSATION ON Condensation on drums.

DRUM

06 1 INVALID ERROR S-VHS/VHS cassette in use.

08 1 SUP TENSION Tape tension abnormal. (AUTO OFF)

FAILURE

32 1~ FAILURE LOADING Tape loading not possible. 32 2

33 1~ FAILURE UNLOADING

Tape unloading not possible. 33 2 (AUTO OFF)

Warning messages on the on-screen display

Warning messages on the counter display

As this unit uses a microcomputer, it may not function correctly due to noise from outside or interference noise. In this case, unplug the power cord and plug it again. Then, check the operation.

14 TROUBLESHOOTING

14-1 WARNINGS WITH INDICATORS

This machine features self-diagnostic circuitry which allows it to detect and report any malfunctions that may occur. When a malfunction is detected, the cause will be shown on the monitor display and on the VCR’s counter display. The warning code system consists of a main code (the code number) and a sub code (verbal description), e.g. 02 1 CONDENSATION ON DRUM. The front panel [AUTO OFF] indicator will normally be illuminated.

* When the [AUTO OFF] indicator is illuminated, the unit is no longer operable. The [AUTO OFF] indicator can be

canceled by turning the power off and on again. If the indicator remains lit even after turning the power off and on, malfunctions are possible. Consult your local JVC dealer.

Turn the [POWER] switch OFF. Wait for at least 5 minutes, then turn the power ON again. If the warning indication is displayed again, consult your local JVC dealer.

Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible. Action: Turn the power off and then on.

Behavior: Cassette ejected and drum begins

to rotate. When condensation is eliminated, the indicator goes out and cassette can be loaded.

Action: Leave the power ON and wait until

the waraning message goes out.

Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible. Action: Turn the power off and then on.

Behavior: Cassette ejected. Action: Load the cassette again.

Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible. Action: Turn the power off and then on.

Behavior: Cassette ejected. Action: Use Digital-S cassette tape.

Refer to “1.8 WARNING DETECTION CIRCUIT” on page 1.12 of the service manual.

←

146

14 TROUBLESHOOTING

14-1 WARNINGS WITH INDICATORS

Warning On-screen display Warningcode information Behavior and actions to be taken code

41 1 CASSETTE EJECT Cassette does not come (AUTO OFF)

FAILURE out in Eject.

56 1~ TAPE DEFECTIVE Tape defect. 56 9 Tape loose

57 1~ END LEADER Tape end sensor abnormal. 57 2 DETECTION

58 1~ BEGIN LEADER Tape beginning sensor 58 2 DETECTION abnormal.

70 1 DRUM MOTOR Drum stops motion. (AUTO OFF)

FAILURE

71 1 CAPSTAN MOTOR Capstan stops its motion. (AUTO OFF)

FAILURE

72 1~ SUP REEL MOTOR Supply reel motor motion 72 8 FAILURE abnormal. (AUTO OFF)

73 1~ TU REEL MOTOR Takeup reel motor motion 73 8 FAILURE abnormal. (AUTO OFF)

Behavior: Only warning indicator is active. Action: Consult your local JVC dealer.

When the MENU button is pressed, the indication goes out.

Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible. Action: Turn the power off and then on.

Behavior: Cassette ejected. Action: If no abnormality is found in tape,

reload the cassette.

If there are any abnormalities when the self-diagnostics run after the power is turned on, the following warning indications ar

e shown. Self-diagnostics are executed when menu switch No. 357 <DIAG AT POWER ON> is set to “ON”. The warning code is shown in 6 digits. “ x ” mark shows unspecified.

Behavior: Stops, with no operation possible. Action: Turn the power off and then on.

Behavior: Tape is fast-forwarded. If tape

begin is still detected 3 seconds later, cassette is ejected.

Action: Reload the cassette.

Behavior: Tape is rewound. If tape end is still

detected 3 seconds later, cassette is ejected.

Action: Reload the cassette.

80xxxx CPU BUS FAILURE Signal communication

between VCR’s microprocessors abnormal.

820100 EEPROM FAILURE EEPROM signal 820300 communication in VCR

abnormal.

840100 SYSCON REF FAILURE System controller reference

signal failure.

850100 M/S REF Mechanical controller

FAILURE reference signal failure.

860100 TC REF FAILURE Time code reference failure.

C0xxxx MECHA(NO TAPE) *1 Abnormal mechanical

FAILURE operation.

On-screen display

DIAG WARNING 800400

CPU BUS FAILURE

(PUSH MENU KEY)

* Serial digital signals are used in conformity

with SMPTE259M for video and with AES/ EBU for audio.

If the C02XXX indicator appears when the power is turned ON it means that condensation has occurred. Press the [MENU] button until the indicator goes out. Once the indicator has gone out, you can operate the unit as usual.

147

14 TROUBLESHOOTING

14-2 TROUBLES NOT TO BE WARNED BY INDICATORS

Symptoms Cause Action

Not operable

Not recordable

Playback impossible

On-screen display does not come up

Noise appears on part of the playback picture.

Tape counter does not run.

Menu setting cannot be changed.

● Set [REMOTE] button to “LOCAL”.

● Set Menu switch No. 002 <OPERATION

LOCK> to “OFF”.

● Press [MENU] button to restore normal

mode.

● Set cassette’s protective slider to “REC”.

● Set menu switch No. 351 <PRE READ> to

“OFF”.

● S-VHS/VHS cassette not acceptable

● Connect monitor to [LINE2-SUPER OUT].

● Set [ON SCREEN] switch to ON.

● Clean the heads as instructed on page 11.

● Set menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACK-

ING> to “ON”.

If noise appears when set to “ON”, set to

“OFF” and perform manual tracking adjustment.

● Set menu switch No. 112 <ECC MODE> to

“NORMAL”.

● Press [MENU] button and enter Tape

Counter mode.

● Set menu switch No. 00D <MENU LOCK>

to “OFF”.

● The [REMOTE] button is set to “Remote”.

● Menu switch No. 002 <OPERATION

LOCK > set to“ ON”

● Menu setting mode entered

● Protective slider on the cassette not at

“REC”

● Menu switch No. 351 <PRE READ> is set

to “VID-ON” or “AUD-ON”.

● S-VHS/VHS cassette in use

● Monitor not connected to [LINE2-SUPER

OUT]

● [ON SCREEN] switch on the sub panel set

to OFF.

● The heads are dirty.

● Menu switch No. 005 <AUTO TRACKING>

set to “OFF”.

● Menu switch No. 112 <ECC MODE> set to

“NO CONCEAL” or “NO CORRECTION”

● CTL counter does not run on a non-

recorded section of the tape as no CTL signal is recorded on such a section.

● Counter is in Menu Switch Setting mode.

● Menu switch No. 00D <MENU LOCK> is

set to “ON”.

Input signal cannot be switched.

The Menu Switch Setting mode cannot be engaged.

During playback, the onscreen sub time code indication does not advance.

● Set menu switch No. 371 <INPUT SE-

LECT SAFETY> to “OFF” or press the signal switch while pressing the [SHIFT] button.

● Install the SA-D95U. Otherwise, digital

signals cannot be selected.

● Set menu switch No. 374 <MENU OPEN

SAFETY> to “OFF” or press the [MENU] button while pressing the [SHIFT] button.

● Set menu switch No. 450 <SUB TC (VITC)

REC> to “ON” or menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUT SELECT> to “SUB TC”.

● Menu switch No. 371 <INPUT SELECT

SAFETY> is set to “ON”.

● The optional SA-D95U digital interface

board is not installed.

● Menu switch No. 374 <MENU OPEN

SAFETY> is set to “ON”.

● Menu switch No. 450 <SUB TC (VITC)

REC> is set to “OFF” and menu switch No. 451 <VITC OUT SELECT> is set to “OFF” or “TC”.

● Sub time code is not recorded normally.

148

15 APPENDIX

SA-D95U Digital Interface Board

Install in the BR-D95U. This is used to input and output video and audio digital signals.

Precautions

● Do not use screws 8 mm or longer to secure the

rack mount adapter and slide rail inner members to the VCR, as doing so may damage the printed circuit boards inside the VCR.

● The handle on the rack mount adapter is only for

sliding the VCR in and out. Do not lift the VCR with this handle.

●

When installing the VCR in a rack, make sure there is sufficient clearance above and below the VCR for heat radiation.

● Some racks may require that you mount the slide

rails in a particular way. If you have any questions, consult the rack dealer.

Rack Mount Adapter SA-K67

SA-K67 is a rack mount adapter used to mount this unit on a 19" EIA standard rack.

䡲 Mount rail & bracket

When mounting the unit on a rack with the SAK67, a mount rail and mount bracket are also required. Recommended models:

● Acuryde Co., Ltd. 2038-22 (mount rail)

BK2038 (bracket)

䡲 Installation

1. Secure the rack mount adapter to the VCR with 6 M4 screws.

2. Secure the slide rail inner member to the VCR with 6 M4 screws.

3. Mount the slide rail outer members on the front and rear ends of the rack using the bracket.

4. Pull out the rails in the slide rail outer members until you hear a click.

5. Fit the right and left slide rails on the VCR into the pulled-out rails and push them in together. The rails will be blocked by right and left springs, so press the springs with your fingers and push the VCR further in.

15-2 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES15-1 Operation Button Combinations

REC+PLAY Starts recording REC+HOLD Starts recording current

adjustment (top menu 00E)

SET+HOLD Sets the top menu (00A — 00D)

(SET) PLAY+FF 1.07x playback PLAY+REW 0.93x playback PLAY+ jog dial STILL — 2x playback PLAY+ search dial Variable playback (0.9x to 1.1x

playback) SEARCH+ jog dial Changes menu switch setting

value (menu switch setting)

Changes time code data (time

code setting)

Changes fixed time data (top

menu 00F) STOP+STANDBY+ Starts head cleaning REW+FF (No tape) SET+RESET Registers counter memory point SET+PREROLL Starts counter search SHIFT+PREROLL Starts fixed time cue up SHIFT+SEARCH Variable mode (Only the player

during swap editing) IN+ENTRY Registers the IN point OUT+ENTRY Registers the OUT point IN+OUT Duration display IN+CANCEL Cancels the IN point OUT+CANCEL Cancels the OUT point IN+PREROLL Cues the IN point OUT+PREROLL Cues the OUT point IN+jog dial Corrects the IN point OUT+jog dial Corrects the OUT point IN+OUT+jog dial Corrects the duration SHIFT+IN+ENTRY Registers the audio split point (IN

point) SHIFT+IN Indicates the audio split point (IN

point) SHIFT+IN+jog dial Corrects the audio split point (IN

point) SHIFT+IN+CANCEL Cancels the audio split point (IN

point) SHIFT+PREVIEW Review SHIFT+AUTO EDIT Last edit SHIFT+input video Switches input signal when signal or audio signal menu switch No.371<INPUT select button SELECT SAFETY> is set to “ON”. SHIFT+MENU Opens the menu switch setting

display when menu switch No.

374 <MENU OPEN SAFETY> is

set to “ON”. SHIFT+COUNTER ON/OFF switching of the counter

mode (user bits) PLAYER+RECORDER Recorder and player

simultaneous operation mode SHIFT+STANDBY Switches the edit on-screen

display ON/OFF SHIFT+RECORDER Activates the learn function

CANCEL+AUTO EDIT To cancel the player and recorder

edit points as well as the audio

split point:

SHIFT+REC

Open the<STRIPING REC MENU>

SHIFT+P. PLAY Program Playback mode P. PLAY+PLAY Starts the program playback. P. PLAY+ jog dial Sets the program playback speed.

149

15-3 INDEX

15 APPENDIX

Adjustment ............................................................ 118

Assemble editing ................................................... 104

Audio emphasis....................................................... 74

Audio input connectors............................................ 19

Audio input switch ................................................... 24

Audio monitor switch ...............................................14

Audio output connectors ......................................... 20

Audio recording level............................................... 71

Audio split editing ..................................................112

Audio V. fade function .............................................80

Cassette tape ..........................................................11

Channel condition indicator ..................................... 22

Color frame servo setting ......................................105

Condensation ..........................................................10

Counter memory ..................................................... 86

Counter switch ........................................................ 21

Diagnosis connector................................................ 18

Direct access........................................................... 33

Drop frame .............................................................. 98

Dubbing loop function ........................................... 122

Editing system phase adjustment ......................... 117

Error conceal ........................................................... 80

Error correction ....................................................... 80

Extra line playback ..................................................88

Extra line recording ................................................. 87

Fine meter mode button ..........................................13

Fixed time cue up function ...................................... 91

Head cleaning ......................................................... 11

Hour meter .............................................................. 39

Insert editing.......................................................... 104

Last edit................................................................. 113

Main code.............................................................. 101

Masking setting ....................................................... 64

Match frame ............................................................ 58

Meter mode setting button ...................................... 15

Menu switch list ....................................................... 40

Menu switch setting................................................. 28

Menu switch setting button...................................... 15

Menu switch setting contents ..................................43

Monitor output connector section ............................26

Motion memory function ........................................ 114

Mute/alarm condition display................................... 24

Multi cue-up function ...............................................92

Non-drop frame .......................................................97

Optional equipment ...............................................148

Operation buttons.................................................... 12

Operation mode lock ...............................................65

Power switch ...........................................................12

Pre-read function .................................................. 115

Preview switcher ................................................... 116

Program playback ................................................... 85

Recording current adjustment .................................38

Reference sync signal ............................................. 25

Remote connector ................................................... 20

Remote button......................................................... 14

Repeat playback ..................................................... 86

Search/jog dial ........................................................ 13

Simplified playback speed adjustment function ...... 81

Simultaneous operation .......................................... 90

Slow play ................................................................. 24

Standby ON/OFF .................................................... 16

Striping rec function ................................................ 94

Subcarrier phase adjustment ................................ 121

Sub code ...............................................................102

Sub time code display .............................................96

Sub time code playback ........................................102

Sub time code recording ....................................... 102

Swap editing ......................................................... 107

Synchronized running mode ................................... 81

Time code display ................................................... 96

Time code generator setting buttons ...................... 18

Time code playback .............................................. 101

Time code presetting............................................... 97

Time code recording ............................................... 99

Time code setting switch section ............................ 18

Top menu ................................................................28

User page................................................................ 34

User bit auto preset function ................................... 63

Variable-motion editing ......................................... 113

Variable slow playback ........................................... 83

Video control connector .......................................... 27

Video input connectors ........................................... 25

Video input switch ................................................... 14

Video phase adjustment........................................ 118

Warning ................................................................. 145

150

16 SPECIFICATIONS

䢇 General

Format Type D-9 (Digital S)

Tape width 12.65 mm

Tape speed 57.737 mm/sec. (525), 57.795 mm/s (625)

Signal format NTSC standard (525), PAL standard (625)

Dimensions 429 mm (W) x 189 mm (H) x 569 mm (D) (16-15/16" x 7-1/2" x 22-7/16")

Weight Approx. 22 kg (48.5 lbs.)

Power consumption Approx. 1.7 A to 0.8 A

Power supply AC 110 V to 240 V ~, 50 Hz/60 Hz

Record/play time (w/DS-104) (Record/play) Approx. 104 min.

REW/FF time (w/DS-104) Approx. 3 min.

Operating temperature 5˚C to 40˚C (41˚F to 104˚F)

Storage temperature -20˚C to 60˚C (-4˚F to 140˚F)

Operating humidity 30% to 80%RH

䢇 Video signal

Input Composite 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced

Component Y: 1 Vp-p/R-Y, B-Y, 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced

Output Composite 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced

Component Y: 1 Vp-p/R-Y, B-Y, 0.7 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced

External input 0.43 Vp-p (B.B) (525), 0.45 Vp-p (B.B) (625), 75 ohms, unbalanced

Sampling frequency Y: 13.5 MHz, R-Y/B-Y: 6.75 MHz Quantization 8 bits

Frequency range Y: 0 - 5.75 MHz, +1.0 dB/-3.0 dB (analog component in/out)

R-Y/B-Y: 0 - 2.75 MHz, +1.0 dB/-3.0 dB

S/N More than 50 dB (analog composite in/out)

More than 55 dB (analog component in/out) More than 60 dB (digital in/analog component out)

䢇 Audio signal

Input Line input -20/-6/0/+4 dBs, high impedance, balanced

Output Line output -6/0/+4 dBs, low impedance, balanced

Monitor output -6/0/+4 dBs, low impedance, balanced

Headphone -∞ to -14 dBs, 8 ohms

Sampling frequency 48 kHz

Quantization 16 bits

No. of channels 4

Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz

Dynamic range 85 dB or more

Wow & flutter Below a measurable value

䢇 Time code

LTC input 0 ± 6 dBs, high impedance, balanced

LTC output 0 ± 3 dBs, low impedance, balanced

䢇 Accessories Power cable (A Type: 125 V, 7 A / C Type: 250 V, 10 A)

Repeat Tye x 1

䢇 When the optional SA-D95U is installed

Serial video/audio input Conforming to SMPTE259M/CCIR656-III

Serial video/audio output Conforming to SMPTE259M/CCIR656-III, 800 mVp-p ± 10%

Digital audio input 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, conforms to AES/EBU standard

Digital audio output 1 Vp-p/3 Vp-p or more (switchable with built-in switch), 75 ohms, unbalanced,

conforms to AES/EBU standard

Design and specifications subject to change without notice.

151

DIMENSIONS

Unit: mm

Design and specifications subject to change without notice.

1656922.5

429

174

POWER

OFF

REC

PLAY

PAUSE/STILL

REW

STOP

EJECT

PHONES

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

REC

PLAY

PULL FOR VARIABLE

TRACKING

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4/

TRACKING

SET

HOLD

PB PB/EE

COUNTER

CONDITION

AUDIO INPUT

VIDEO INPUT

AUDIO MONITOR

PULL RELEASE

RESET

VCON

REMOTE

TOP VIDEO AUDIO

OTHERSON SCREENTIME CODESERVO/SYS

USER

INSERT

STAND BY

PLAYER

VAR

P.PLAY

DA3

DA2

DA1VIDEO

ASSEM

ENTRY

OUT

CANCEL

SHIFT

REVIEW

METER MODE

TRACKING

FINE

PREVIEW

AUTO EDIT

PREROLL

RECORDER

DA4

VIDEO CASSETTE RECORDER

BR-D95U

STILL

X-1

REV

FWD

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

SIF

SDI

AES/EBU

AUDIO INPUT / AUDIO MONITOR SELECT

LINE

CPN

ANALOG

PULL

RELEASE

CTL

P.READ

AUTO

OFF

V.VAR

REMOTE

PB/EE

16:9

UBDF

SERVO

GENCF

525

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

dB dB

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

dB dB

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

dB dB

R P

OVER

–60

–2

–4

–40

–30

–20

–10

dB dB

625

Variable Motion

COMPONENT DIGITAL

16 SPECIFICATIONS

JVC BR-D95U User Manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS

MAIN FEATURES

CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION

1-1 OUTLINE

1-2 MAINTENANCE

1-3 PRECAUTIONS

1-4 VIDEO CASSETTE

1-5 HEAD CLEANING

2-1 FRONT PANEL

2 CONTROLS, CONNECTORS AND DISPLAYS

2-2 SUB PANEL

2-3 REAR PANEL

2-4 COUNTER DISPLAY

2-5 ON-SCREEN DISPLAY

3 CONNECTIONS

3-1 INPUT CONNECTIONS

3-2 OUTPUT CONNECTIONS

3-3 CONTROL SYSTEM CONNECTIONS

4-1 MENU DISPLAY MODES

4 MENU SWITCH SETTING

4-2 VIDEO SIGNAL SYSTEM SELECTION

4-3 MENU SWITCH SETTING

4-4 SAVING AND CALLING UP MENU SWITCH SETTINGS

4-5 CALLING UP FUNCTIONAL MENU SWITCH (Direct Access Function)

4-6 USER PAGE REGISTRATION/CHANGE/DELETE (User page function)

4-7 HOW TO LOCK THE MENU SWITCH SETTINGS (Menu switch lock function)

4-8 RECORDING CURRENT ADJUSTMENT

4-9 HOUR METER DATA DISPLAY

5 MENU SWITCH SETTING DETAILS

5-1 MENU SWITCH LIST

5-2 MENU SWITCH SETTING CONTENT

6 PREPARATION

6-1 OPERATION MODE LOCK

6-2 STANDBY ON/OFF

6-3 LOADING AND UNLOADING THE CASSETTE

7 RECORDING

7-1 PREPARATION FOR RECORDING

7-2 INPUT VIDEO AND AUDIO SIGNAL SELECTION

7-3 AUDIO MONITOR OUTPUT SIGNAL SELECTION

7-4 AUDIO RECORD LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

7-5 BASIC RECORDING OPERATIONS

7-6 DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT

8 PLAYBACK

8-1 PREPARATION FOR PLAYBACK

8-2 BASIC PLAYBACK OPERATIONS

8-3. AUDIO PLAYBACK LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

8-4 MANUAL TRACKING AJUSTMENT

8-5 ERROR CORRECTION

8-6. AUDIO V. FADE FUNCTION

8-7 SIMPLIFIED PLAYBACK SPEED ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION

8-8 SHUTTLE SEARCH/JOG OPERATION

8-9 VARIABLE SLOW PLAYBACK

8-10 PROGRAM PLAYBACK

8-11 FF, REW AND COUNTER MEMORY FUNCTIONS

8-12 REPEAT PLAYBACK

9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

9-1 EXTRA LINE DATA RECORDING/PLAYBACK

9-2 EXTRA LINE, VITC LINE, V. BLANK MASK and PB EXTENSION LINE settings

9-3 SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION

9-4 FIXED TIME CUE UP FUNCTION

9-5 MULTI CUE-UP FUNCTION

9-6 STRIPING REC Function

10 HOW TO USE TIME CODE

10-1 TIME CODE DISPLAY

10-2 TIME CODE INITIAL SETTING (PRESET)

10-3 TIME CODE RECORDING

10-4 TIME CODE PLAYBACK

10-5 SUB TIME CODE RECORDING AND PLAYBACK

10-6 TIME CODE SWITCH SETTING FOR EDITING

11 EDITING

11-1 OUTLINE

11-2 COLOR FRAME SERVO SETTING

11-3 SWAP EDITING

11-4 AUDIO SPLIT EDITING

11-5 OTHER FUNCTION